JP7391410B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game and executes an effect based on the determination result.

In conventional gaming machines, when a game ball enters the starting hole and it is determined whether or not to execute a special game, the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display device in a manner that shows the determination result after the special symbol is variably displayed. The pattern will be stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in a predetermined image display device, a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner as the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and a judgment result is displayed as the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Decorative patterns are displayed in a static state.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-96091

By the way, in the conventional gaming machines, there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest of the performance.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the performance.

The present invention employs the following configuration to solve the above problems.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine comprising a main control means and a performance control means, and the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player when a starting condition is established. identification information display control means for displaying the result of the determination by displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display when the determination is made; and command transmission means for transmitting a predetermined command. , the production control means is capable of receiving commands from the command transmission means, and varies a plurality of first production symbols corresponding to the identification information in accordance with the fluctuating display of the identification information, and In response to the stop display of the identification information, the plurality of first performance symbols are stopped and displayed, and in response to the fluctuating display of the identification information, the second performance symbols corresponding to the identification information are varied, and the identification information is stopped. The second effect symbols are stopped and displayed in accordance with the display, and when the determination means determines that a special game is to be played, a plurality of the first effect symbols are displayed in the special game before the identification information is stopped and displayed. It is possible to perform a specific display effect in which the second effect symbol is displayed in a specific manner that suggests that the second effect symbol is to be performed. When temporarily stopping one performance symbol, a first emphasis performance is performed to emphasize the first performance symbol in the specific mode by displaying a first predetermined image , and after the first emphasis performance, the first performance symbol is A second highlighting effect is performed that emphasizes the first effect pattern of the temporarily stopped specific mode by displaying a second predetermined image different from the image , and a temporary stop display of the first effect pattern of the specific mode is performed. The execution time of the first emphasis performance is different from the execution time of the second emphasis performance, and the execution time of the second emphasis performance is different from the execution time of the second emphasis performance. The emphasizing performance of the first performance symbol is not performed until the first performance symbol of the specific mode is stopped and displayed, and the first emphasizing performance and the second emphasizing performance are performed while the first performance symbol is being stopped and displayed. do not.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance.

Schematic front view of pachinko gaming machine 1 A schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Enlarged view of display 4 in FIG. 1 A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Flowchart showing an example of main processing executed by the game control unit 100 Detailed flowchart of the starting port switch process in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of gate switch processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing in step S4 in FIG. Flowchart showing details of the jackpot determination process in step S407 of FIG. 8 Flowchart showing details of the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S408 in FIG. 8 Detailed flowchart showing the stopping process of step S416 in FIG. 8 Detailed flowchart showing normal symbol processing in step S5 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the big winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. Detailed flowchart showing the gaming state setting process of step S620 in FIG. 13 Detailed flowchart of electric tulip processing in Figure 5 It is a diagram showing the breakdown of the jackpot symbols selected according to winnings in each starting hole, and a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each symbol. Diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern A diagram showing an example of the mode of decorative symbols in the game state and each production section. A diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of special symbols in the normal gaming state. A diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of special symbols in a variable probability gaming state. Diagram showing the flow of variable effects including SPSP reach effects Diagram showing details of winning notification performed as a result of SPSP reach effect A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including the SPSP reach effect shown in FIG. 22 is performed. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a winning notification is performed, which is a production following FIG. 23. Diagram showing details of loss notification performed as a result of SPSP reach performance A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a loss notification is performed, which is a production following FIG. 23. Diagram showing the flow of the performance when the re-lottery performance is performed during the winning notification A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a re-lottery effect is performed during winning notification. Diagram showing the flow of variable effects including special effects Diagram showing details of winning notifications performed as a result of special effects A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including the special effect shown in FIG. 29 is performed. A diagram showing another example of the image displayed on the screen when variable effects including special effects are performed. Diagram showing the flow of variable effects when a jackpot is determined in variable probability gaming state A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variation effect shown in FIG. 33 is performed. A diagram showing an example of the production following FIG. 34 A diagram showing an example of the flow of a variable performance when a second light emission performance is performed after the first light emission performance when a winning notification is performed in a variable probability gaming state. A diagram showing an example of the effect displayed on the screen when a 4R normal jackpot is determined in the variable probability gaming state. Time chart to explain the execution timing of the non-reach light effect in the normal gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a light-emitting effect during non-reach when three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop at the same time in a normal game state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a light-emitting effect during non-reach when three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop in order in a normal game state Time chart for explaining the execution timing of the non-reach light effect in the variable probability gaming state An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a light-emitting effect during non-reach when three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop at the same time in a variable probability game state An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a light-emitting performance during non-reach when three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop in sequence in a variable probability game state A table to explain the total number of non-reach lighting effects for each variation pattern in the normal gaming state. A table to explain the total number of non-reach lighting effects for each variation pattern in variable probability gaming states. Time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first reach symbol light emission effect in the normal gaming state A time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance and the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance in the normal gaming state. An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a ready-to-reach light effect in a normal gaming state An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a reach symbol light-emitting effect in a normal gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the second ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting performance in the normal gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the second ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting performance in the normal gaming state Time chart for explaining the execution timing of the reach light emission effect in the variable probability gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting performance in a variable probability gaming state Explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting performance in a variable probability gaming state A table for explaining the total number of times of the first reach symbol light-emitting display, the second reach symbol light-emitting display, and the winning light-emitting display in the normal gaming state. A table for explaining the total number of times of the first reach symbol light-emitting display, the second reach symbol light-emitting display, and the winning light-emitting display in a variable probability gaming state. A diagram illustrating an example of the flow of effects over the variations of multiple special symbols when a look-ahead chance is displayed. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed. A diagram showing an example of the production following FIG. 58 A diagram showing an example of a variable effect when a NEXT symbol suggesting a pseudo-connection is displayed in a normal gaming state. A diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variation effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed. A diagram showing a comparison of the swing periods of the decorative pattern 55 when a look-ahead chance eye light effect, a reach light effect, and a hit light effect are executed. A diagram showing a comparison of the swing periods of decorative symbols when the production control unit 130 does not normally receive commands from the game control unit 100 Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the production control unit 130 Flowchart showing an example of command reception processing in step S1001 of FIG. 64 Detailed flowchart of pending command processing in step 1302 of FIG. 65 Detailed flowchart of fluctuation start command processing in step 1304 of FIG. 65 Flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control unit 140 Detailed flowchart of lamp control processing by lamp control unit 150

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example of schematic configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
First, the general configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As illustrated in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2 provided with accessories related to prize winning and determination (lottery), and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged parallel to the game board 2 at a predetermined distance, and this glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which game balls can flow down. has been done.

When the player grips the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper tray 28 are guided to a firing device (not shown) and are fired with a batting force corresponding to the rotation angle of the lever 21. It is fired into the game area 10. This game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the fired game ball is guided to an upper position in the game area 10, and when it comes into contact with the game nails, windmills, etc. It falls along the game board 2 while changing the direction of movement. Note that the firing of the game balls is temporarily stopped by the player operating the stop button 22.

The upper tray 28 is for storing game balls and prize balls to be supplied to the firing device. A lower tray 29 for storing prize balls is provided below the upper tray 28. When the player operates the take-out button 23 located close to the lower tray 29, a part of the lower surface of the lower tray 29 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the lower tray 29 are placed below the lower tray 29. It falls into a box (not shown).

When the player performs a so-called "left-handed hit" in which the lever 21 is kept rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is hit with a relatively weak batting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left side area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed hit" in which the lever 21 is kept rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is hit with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right side area in the game area 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

A first starting opening 11, a second starting opening 12, two normal winning openings 14, a first gate 15, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passage path of the game ball hit to the left as accessories related to winning and judgment. It is being In addition, on the passage path of the game ball hit right, there are the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 13, two normal winning openings 14, the second gate 16, and the electric tulip as accessories related to winning and judgment. 17 are provided.

In the process of flowing down along the game board 2, the game ball launched into the game area 10 enters one of the first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, big winning hole 13, and normal winning hole 14. and win a prize. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 28 or the lower tray 29 according to the winning spot. Note that the game balls that do not win are discharged from the gaming area 10 via the discharge port 18.

The first starting port 11 as a first starting region is a starting port that is always open, and the second starting port 12 as a second starting region is a state in which an electric tulip 17 as a normal electric accessory is operating. This is a starting port that is only opened when In the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball passes through the first starting port 11 and wins a prize, or when a game ball passes through the second starting port 12 and wins a prize, a jackpot game (special game) that is advantageous to the player is played. It is determined whether or not to execute, and the determination result is displayed on a display 4, which will be described later.

In addition, in the following explanation, the judgment executed on the condition that the game ball enters the first starting hole 11 is called "first special symbol judgment," and the judgment that is executed on the condition that the game ball enters the second starting hole 12 is called "first special symbol judgment." The determination to be performed will be referred to as the "second special symbol determination", and these determinations (lotteries) will be collectively referred to as the "special symbol determination (special symbol lottery)".

The big winning hole 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big winning hole 13 is provided at the opening of the big winning hole 13. The big prize opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is a "jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the jackpot game in which the plate is operated to open the jackpot 13. is executed. Therefore, by hitting right during a jackpot game, the player can obtain more prize balls than when a jackpot game is not being played.

The electric tulip 17 is arranged close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 is configured to be able to change its posture between a closed position (see FIG. 1) in which the pair of blade members closes the second starting port 12 and an open position (not shown) in which the second starting port 12 is opened. ing.

The second starting port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17, as illustrated in FIG. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16, it is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 12, although the prize ball is not paid out. When it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 maintains the open position for a specified time and then returns to the closed position a specified number of times. In this way, when the electric tulip 17 is not operating, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting port 12, but when the electric tulip 17 is activated, the game ball is easily able to pass through the second starting port 12. Become. In addition, in the following explanation, the determination (lottery) executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 will be referred to as "normal symbol determination (normal symbol lottery)".

The normal winning hole 14 is always open like the first starting hole 11, and is a winning hole from which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball wins. Note that, unlike the first starting opening 11 and the like, even if a game ball wins in the normal winning opening 14, no determination (lottery) is performed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the second starting port 12 and wins a prize, it is possible to win a jackpot, a small win (as an example, it may be a small win with a probability of 1/7), or a loss. It may be determined which one is. Further, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming state may shift from a low probability gaming state and a non-auxiliary gaming state to a low probability gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state (the gaming state will be described later). In such a gaming machine 1, for example, when a jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed on the display 4 (specifically, the second special symbol display 42), the jackpot 13 is opened. A jackpot game to be used is executed. On the other hand, when the small winning symbol informing that it is a small winning is stopped and displayed on the display 4, first, a small winning game using a small winning hole having a V winning hole inside is executed. For example, a plate for opening and closing the small winning hole is provided at the opening of the small winning hole. The small prize opening is usually closed by this plate. When the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the display 4, a small winning game is executed in which the plate is operated to open the small prize opening. On the condition that the game ball passes through the V winning hole during this small winning game, a jackpot game using the large winning hole 13 is started following the small winning game. Therefore, by hitting right during the small winning game, the player can obtain more prize balls than when the small winning game is not played. In addition, if the game ball does not pass through the V prize opening during the small winning game, the jackpot game following the small winning game will not be executed, and the gaming state will not shift to the time saving gaming state.

[Example of configuration of presentation means of pachinko gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 5, a movable accessory 7, a speaker 24, a board lamp 25, and a performance button 26 for performing various performances. It is being Further, the frame member 3 has a built-in frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 4) that is not shown in FIG.

The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays effect images, and is provided at a position easily visible to the player. The liquid crystal display device 5 displays various display objects, such as decorative symbols that notify the results of special symbol determination, characters and items that provide preview effects, and pending icons that are displayed as many times as the number of pending special symbol determinations. A production image containing the following will be displayed. Note that the image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

The movable accessory 7 is configured to be movable with respect to the game board 2, and is usually retracted to a retracted position between the screen and the game board 2 on the left and right sides of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and is not operated. Sometimes it is configured to extend to the front of the screen. The movable accessory 7 has a built-in light emitting element (for example, an LED), and when the LED emits light, part or all of the movable accessory 7 emits light. The movable accessory 7 performs various effects by moving or emitting light based on the result of special symbol determination.

The panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects using light, such as changing lighting or blinking patterns and changing the color of light emitted. The speaker 24 outputs music, audio, sound effects, etc., and performs a sound performance in synchronization with the display performance performed on the liquid crystal display device 5.

In this embodiment, in order to suggest the level of the possibility of winning a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "reliability"), a presentation image is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5, and a presentation device that can emit light (specific In some cases, the performance accessory 7, the board lamp 25, and the frame lamp 37) are made to emit light. In this embodiment, white, blue, green, red, zebra, and rainbow colors are used as colors that indicate the level of reliability. The reliability of each color is high in the order listed above. In this embodiment, colors below red are used for jackpots and losses, and do not function as colors that suggest jackpots (that is, the confidence level is 100%). Zebras have a relatively high degree of reliability no matter which direction they are used in, and there are two types of effects: zebras are used only when there is a jackpot, and zebras are used both when there is a jackpot and when there is a loss. be. Specifically, for example, when zebra is used to display a cut-in image, it functions as a color that suggests a jackpot, and when used as a color for a pending icon, the reliability is relatively high (for example, 76%). Rainbow colors have a 100% confidence level and are only used when there is a jackpot (ie, they are not used when it is a loss). Note that other single colors (for example, red) may be used instead of zebra and rainbow colors, or other composite colors (for example, a composite color of red, yellow, and white) may be used as the color that suggests a jackpot. It's okay to be hit.

[Example of configuration of operation means of pachinko gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with a performance button 26 and a performance key 27 as operation means operated by the player. The production button 26 is a push button that is pressed by the player to input operation information. The production button 26 is configured to be able to protrude upward by a drive mechanism (not shown). When performing a performance using the performance button 26 (specifically, from the start to the end of the valid period during which the operation of the performance button 26 is valid), the top surface remains in the normal state and the top surface changes from the normal state. There are cases where it stands out. The presence or absence of a protrusion may be determined based on, for example, the determination result of jackpot determination, the type of jackpot symbol, the type of variation pattern, or all or part of these. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the reliability of a jackpot depending on the appearance of the performance button 26. In this embodiment, one type of operation (that is, pressing) is possible for the effect button 26 regardless of whether it is protruded or not.

Note that in other embodiments, the operating means may be configured in advance so that a plurality of types of operations are possible with respect to one operating means. For example, the types of operations that can be performed on the effect button 26 in the normal state may be different from the types of operations that are possible on the effect button 26 in the protruded state. Specifically, for example, the production button 26 can be pressed in the normal state, and when the production button 26 is controlled to protrude, it is controlled to be impossible to press and the top surface of the production button 26 is The configuration may be such that the player can perform an operation such as pulling the player toward himself or herself. For example, the player may be prompted to perform one operation selected from a plurality of types of operations prepared in advance in order to indicate the reliability of a jackpot. Which type of operation to prompt may be determined based on, for example, the result of jackpot determination, the type of jackpot symbol, the type of variation pattern, or all or part of these.

The production key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform selection operations. In the pachinko game machine 1, a performance may be performed depending on the operation of the performance button 26 or the performance key 27.

Note that, apart from the performance button 26, an operating means that can be operated by the player may be provided. For example, two operating means having different degrees of reliability regarding jackpot may be provided. For example, if the reliability is relatively low, the player is prompted to operate the first operating means (for example, the effect button 26), and if the reliability is relatively high, the player is prompted to operate the second operating means. You may be prompted to do so. The second operating means may be provided, for example, at a position that is more difficult for the player to operate than the first operating means (for example, to the left of the lower tray 29). This makes it possible to indicate the degree of reliability based on which operating means the player is prompted to operate. Note that when the second operating means is operated during an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operating means, the same effect as when the first operating means is operated may be performed in response to the operation. , another effect different from that when the first operating means is operated may be executed, or no effect may be executed at all.

[Example of configuration of display unit 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. 1. The display 4 mainly displays information regarding special symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and as illustrated in FIG. It is comprised of a special symbol pending display 43, a second special symbol pending display 44, a normal symbol display 45, a normal symbol pending display 46, a game status display 47, a round display 48, and the like.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 displays the symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. Notify the judgment result. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination. Notify the judgment result. The first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 have a jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is a "jackpot" or a "loss" symbol as a determination symbol. ” is stopped and displayed.

The first special symbol reservation display 43 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination.

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display device 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by variably displaying the symbols and then stoppingly displaying the determined symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The normal symbol pending display 46 displays the number of pending normal symbol determinations. The gaming status display 47 displays the gaming status at the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. The round display 48 displays the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42.

In the following explanation, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 will be referred to as the "first special symbol", and the symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 will be referred to as the "second special symbol". These are collectively called "special designs." Further, the symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 45 shall be referred to as "normal symbols."

[Configuration of control device of pachinko gaming machine 1]
On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls to be paid out as prize balls, a control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko game machine 1 is provided.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the control device of the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game control unit 100 that controls execution of judgment (lottery), control of jackpot games, command transmission processing to the performance control unit 130, and a game control unit. A production control unit 130 that centrally controls production based on commands received from 100, an image and sound control unit 140 that controls production using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit that controls production using various lamps and movable accessories 7. 150. In addition to the components shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a payout control section (not shown) that controls the payout of prize balls.

[Configuration of game control unit 100]
The game control unit 100 includes a CPU 101, a ROM 102, and a RAM 103. The CPU 101 performs various calculation processes related to the number of prize balls to be paid out, such as internal lottery and determination of winning, based on the program stored in the ROM 102. The RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 101 executes the above programs or as a work area for data processing.

The game control unit 100 includes a first starting switch (SW) 111, a second starting switch (SW) 112, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 113, a first gate switch (SW) 114, and a second gate switch (SW) 115. , a big winning opening switch (SW) 116, a big winning opening control section 117, a normal winning opening switch (SW) 118, and a display 4 are connected.

The first starting port switch 111 detects that a game ball has entered the first starting port 11 and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100. The second starting port switch 112 detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 12 and outputs the detection signal to the game control unit 100. The electric tulip opening/closing unit 113 opens and closes the second starting port 12 by operating an electric solenoid connected to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 in a drive-transferable manner according to a control signal from the game control unit 100. do. The first gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 15 and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100. The second gate switch 115 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100. The big winning hole switch 116 detects that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 13, and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100. The big winning opening control unit 117 opens and closes the big winning opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid that is connected to a plate that closes the big winning opening 13 in a drive-transferable manner according to a control signal from the gaming control unit 100. do. The normal winning hole switch 118 detects that the game ball has entered the normal winning hole 14 and outputs the detection signal to the game control section 100.

When a detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 111, the second starting port switch 112, the big winning port switch 116, or the normal winning port switch 118, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 detects the location where the game ball has won. The payout control unit is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the payout control unit, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on information from the payout control unit.

The CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the first starting port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random number. Further, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the second starting port switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random number. When the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, the special game is executed by opening and closing the big winning hole 13 via the big winning hole control section 117. Further, the CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 or 115 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. When the result of normal symbol determination is a hit, the second starting port 12 is temporarily opened by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening/closing part 113.

Further, the CPU 101 transmits information indicating the start and stop of variation of the special symbols to the production control unit 130. Further, the CPU 101 transmits information regarding the variation setting of the winning probability of the special symbol lottery and the variation setting of the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery to the performance control unit 130. Further, the CPU 101 transmits data indicating a shortening setting of the variation time of the special symbol, information for notifying that a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, etc. to the performance control unit 130. .

Further, the CPU 101 executes the following processing on the display device 4. That is, when the CPU 101 executes the first special symbol determination, it causes the first special symbol display 41 to variably display the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result. Further, when the CPU 101 executes the second special symbol determination, the CPU 101 causes the second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol, and then stops and displays the special symbol indicating the determination result. Further, when the CPU 101 executes the normal symbol determination, the CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display 45 to fluctuately display the normal symbol, and then stops and displays the normal symbol indicating the determination result.

In addition, the CPU 101 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination on the first special symbol reservation display 43, displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination on the second special symbol reservation display 44, and displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination on the second special symbol reservation display 44. The number of reservations is displayed on the normal symbol reservation display 46. Further, the CPU 101 causes the gaming status display 47 to display the gaming status of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 101 causes the round display 48 to display the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

[Configuration of production control unit 130]
The production control unit 130 includes a CPU 131, a ROM 132, a RAM 133, and an RTC (real-time clock) 134. The CPU 131 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the performance based on a program stored in the ROM 132. The RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 131 executes the above program or as a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time.

The performance control unit 130 sets the content of the performance based on data indicating the results of special symbol determination etc. sent from the game control unit 100. The effect control unit 130 transmits a command to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to instruct execution of the effect based on the set effect content.

The image and sound control unit 140 controls the image display of the liquid crystal display device 5 and the sound output of the speaker 24. The image and sound control unit 140 includes a CPU 141, a ROM 142, a RAM 143, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 145, and the like. Based on the program stored in the ROM 142, the CPU 141 performs arithmetic processing when controlling images and sounds representing the performance for which the content of the performance has been set in the performance control unit 130. The RAM 143 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 141 executes the above programs or as a work area for data processing.

The VDP 144 generates an effect image to be displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5. The audio DSP 145 generates audio data output from the speaker 24. The CPU 141 controls the operations of the VDP 144 and the audio DSP 145 by generating control signals based on commands from the production control unit 130 and programs stored in the ROM 142 and outputting the control signals to the VDP 144 and the audio DSP 145.

Although not shown in the figure, the VDP 144 includes a drawing engine that executes rendering processing of the effect image, and an output circuit that outputs the effect image drawn by the drawing engine to the liquid crystal display device 5. The drawing engine draws an effect image on the frame buffer based on a control signal from the CPU 141 using material data stored in the ROM. The output circuit outputs the effect image drawn in this frame buffer to the liquid crystal display device 5 at a predetermined timing.

Although not shown in the figure, the audio DSP 145 also includes an audio ROM that stores various audio data related to performance sounds such as music, voices, and sound effects, and a ROM that is used as a work area for data processing by the audio DSP 145. SDRAM is connected. The audio DSP 145 reads audio data corresponding to the control signal from the CPU 141 from the audio ROM to the SDRAM, executes data processing, and outputs the audio data after data processing to the speaker 24 .

[Configuration of lamp control unit 150]
The lamp control section 150 includes a CPU 151, a ROM 152, and a RAM 153. The CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operations of the board lamp 25, frame lamp 37, performance button 26, and movable accessory 7 based on a program stored in the ROM 152. The RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the CPU 151 executes the above program or as a work area for data processing.

The ROM 152 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. The light emission pattern data is data indicating the light emission patterns of the light emitting elements included in the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 25, and the movable accessory 7. The motion pattern data is data indicating the motion pattern of the movable accessory 7.

The CPU 151 reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control unit 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 152 to the RAM 153, and displays the board lamp 25, frame lamp 37, effect button 26, and movable role. The light emission of the light emitting element of the object 7 is controlled. Further, the CPU 151 reads out the movement pattern data corresponding to the command received from the performance control unit 130 from among the movement pattern data stored in the ROM 152 to the RAM 153, and reads out the movement pattern data corresponding to the command received from the performance control unit 130 to operate the movable accessory 7 and the performance button 26. Controls motor drive.

[Explanation of gaming status]
Here, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. The gaming states include a low probability gaming state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is a first probability, and a high probability gaming state in which the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is a second probability higher than the first probability. There is.

The first probability and the second probability, which are jackpot probabilities, may be fixed values. Further, the first probability and the second probability may change depending on settings.

For example, the jackpot probability may be set to a different probability by a hall clerk performing a predetermined operation. For example, in response to operating (for example, pressing) a setting value switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the gaming control board 100 when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the setting value related to the jackpot probability is set to a predetermined value. (for example, any value from "1" to "6"). The set value switch is, for example, a switch for setting the jackpot probability to a different probability.

For example, the larger the setting value is, the easier it is to get a jackpot, and the ratio between the second probability, which is the jackpot probability in a high probability gaming state, and the first probability, which is the jackpot probability, in a low probability gaming state, is independent of the setting value. It may be fixed. For example, when the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability in the low probability gaming state is set to 1/220, and when the setting value is "2", it is set to 1/200; When it is "3", it is set to 1/180. Also, the jackpot probability when in the high probability gaming state is set to 1/27.5 (= 1/220 x 8 times) when the setting value is "1", and when the setting value is "2" Sometimes it is set to 1/25 (=1/200×8 times), and when the setting value is “3”, it is set to 1/22.5 (=1/180×8 times).

In order to set the jackpot probability, a setting key, a setting change switch, and a setting value display device may be provided. The setting change switch may be provided exclusively for it, or may be used in combination with a RAM clear switch (a switch for initializing the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100). When the setting change switch is used together with the RAM clear switch, for example, when the setting key is turned on (pressed down) and the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned on, the jackpot probability setting If the power is turned on with the setting key turned ON and the RAM clear switch turned OFF, the system will move to the jackpot probability setting confirmation mode, the setting key is turned OFF, and When the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned on, the game enters RAM clear mode (a mode in which the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 is initialized and the game machine is started up), and the setting key is turned off. In addition, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch turned OFF, the game machine enters power recovery mode (without initializing the RAM 103 of the game control unit 100 and maintaining the data from the time the power was turned off immediately before). (startup mode). Note that the gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with a capacitor for holding data stored in the RAM 103 (see FIG. 4) of the gaming control unit 100 when the power is turned off, for example, and the gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with a capacitor for holding data stored in the RAM 103 (see FIG. 4) when the power is turned off for a certain period of time (for example, 24 hours). The configuration is such that data in the RAM 103 can be maintained even if the power is cut off.

Furthermore, the gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment include a non-auxiliary gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state. In the auxiliary game state, the probability of being determined as a hit in normal symbol determination is relatively high (for example, 1/1.1) compared to the non-auxiliary game state. In addition, in the auxiliary game state, the opening time of the electric tulip 17 when a hit is determined in the normal symbol determination is relatively long (for example, 1.8 seconds x 3 times), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relatively long. This is a short (for example, 2 seconds) state. That is, in the auxiliary game state, when the game ball passes through the gate 15 or the gate 16, a normal symbol judgment is performed, and it becomes a hit with a relatively high probability, and the second starting port 12 opens 1.8 seconds x 3 times. The game ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Also, in the auxiliary game state, the special symbol variation time is shortened compared to the non-auxiliary game state.

On the other hand, in the non-auxiliary gaming state, compared to the auxiliary gaming state, the probability of being determined to be a hit in normal symbol determination is relatively low (for example, 1/50), and if it is determined to be a hit in normal symbol determination, The opening time of the electric tulip 17 is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds x 1 time), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is relatively long (for example, 25 seconds). That is, in the non-auxiliary gaming state, even if a normal symbol determination is made when the game ball passes through the gate 15 or 16, the probability of winning is relatively low, and the second starting port 12 is opened for 0.1 seconds x Since it is opened only once, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 12.

In this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the gaming machine 1 is set to a high probability gaming state or a low probability gaming state, and is also set to an auxiliary gaming state or a non-auxiliary gaming state.

Note that the low probability gaming state and the non-auxiliary gaming state is referred to as a "normal gaming state", and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initially set to the normal gaming state. Furthermore, a high probability gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state are referred to as a "probability variable gaming state". Furthermore, the low probability game state and the auxiliary game state are referred to as the "time saving game state".

[Production mode]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, an effect is performed in any one of three types of effect modes corresponding to the current gaming state, except during a jackpot game. Specifically, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, it is the normal mode, when the game is controlled in the variable probability gaming state, it is the variable probability mode, and when the game is controlled in the time saving gaming state, it is the time saving mode. Each performance will be performed.

Note that the normal mode has a plurality of performance modes (stages, for example, stage A, stage B, etc.). The stage itself does not indicate the possibility of a jackpot, and in either normal mode of stage A or stage B, various performances (notice performance, reach performance, hit notification, etc.) described below can be performed.

[Main processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the main processing executed by the game control section 100 will be explained with reference to FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing executed by the game control section 100. The game control unit 100 repeats the series of processes shown in FIG. 5 at fixed time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by interrupt during normal operation, excluding special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Execute. Note that the processing of the game control unit 100 explained based on the flowcharts from FIG. 5 onwards is performed by the CPU 101 executing a program stored in the ROM 102.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 executes a random number update process to update various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a variable pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number is a random number for determining whether the result of special symbol determination is a jackpot or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining a jackpot symbol (type of jackpot) when the result of special symbol determination is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to select a variation pattern of a predetermined variation time (for example, 13 seconds) or more when the result of special symbol determination is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining the winning or failure of the normal symbol lottery. The jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, fluctuation pattern random number, and normal symbol random number are generated by, for example, a random number generator each time the process of step S1 is performed.

Following step S1, the CPU 101 executes a starting port switch (SW) process (step S2). In the starting port switch process, the CPU 101 monitors whether a detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 111 or the second starting port switch 112, and generates each random number (jackpot random number, For the symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers), the values at the time the detection signal is input are acquired and stored in the RAM 103. This starting port switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 6.

Following step S2, the CPU 101 executes gate switch (SW) processing (step S3). In the gate switch process, the CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate switch 114 or 115, and when a detection signal is input, acquires the value of the normal symbol random number updated in the process of step S1. and stores it in the RAM 103. This gate switch processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S3, the CPU 101 executes special symbol processing (step S4). Although details will be described later, in the special symbol processing, it is determined whether or not the result of special symbol determination is a jackpot, and the jackpot symbol if it is a jackpot. Further, the CPU 101 executes special symbol determination using the random number acquired in the starting port switch process in step S2, and causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol. A special symbol indicating the result of special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. The special symbol processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

Following step S4, the CPU 101 executes normal symbol processing (step S5). In the normal symbol processing, the CPU 101 executes normal symbol determination using the ordinary symbol random number acquired in the gate switch processing of step S3, causes the ordinary symbol display 45 to variably display the ordinary symbol, and then displays the result of the ordinary symbol determination. Stop and display the normal symbol indicating . The normal symbol processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 12.

Following step S5, the CPU 101 executes a big winning hole process to open and close the big winning hole 13 via the big winning hole control unit 117 if the special symbol judgment in the special symbol process of step S4 results in a jackpot. (Step S6). The big prize opening process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 13.

Following step S6, the CPU 101 executes electric tulip processing (step S7). In the electric tulip process, the CPU 101 operates the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening/closing section 113 when the normal symbol lottery in the normal symbol process of step S5 is won. The electric tulip processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 15.

Following step S7, the CPU 101 executes a prize ball process that controls the management of the number of winning game balls and the payout of prize balls according to the winnings (step S8). Specifically, when a game ball wins in any of the first starting hole 11, second starting hole 12, big winning hole 13, and normal winning hole 14, the CPU 101 awards the number of prizes according to the winning place. Dispense the ball. For example, the CPU 101 pays out 3 prize balls when a game ball enters the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12, and pays out 15 prize balls when a game ball enters the grand prize opening 13. pay out.

Following step S8, the CPU 101 executes output processing (step S9). In the output processing of step S9, the CPU 101 transmits various commands set in the RAM 103 in the starting opening switch processing of step S2, the special symbol processing of step S4, the big winning opening processing of step S6, etc. to the performance control unit 130.

[Start switch processing by game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, details of the starting port switch process executed in the game control section 100 will be described. FIG. 6 is a detailed flowchart of the starting port switch process in step S2 of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 6, in step S201, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether the first starting port switch 111 has been turned "ON" (whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 11). Determine. When it is determined that the first starting port switch 111 is turned ON (step S201: YES), the pending number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is the first special symbol stored in advance in the ROM 102. It is determined whether the maximum number of reservations for symbol determination is less than Umax1 (for example, 4) (step S202).

When the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U1 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax1 (step S202: YES), the CPU 101 updates the value of the number of reservations U1 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S203). Then, the CPU 101 acquires the values of various random numbers (jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number) updated by the process of step S1, and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S204).

Here, by storing various random numbers acquired in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting hole 11 in the RAM 103, the first special symbol related to the reserved ball that increased the reserved number U1 in step S203 The right to judge will be reserved. Although the details will be described later, the right to judge the first special symbol that has been suspended is consumed in the special symbol processing in step S4, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped and displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. The result of the first special symbol determination is notified.

Subsequently, the CPU 101 executes a preliminary determination process based on the various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 in step S204 (step S205). The preliminary determination process in step S205 is a determination process regarding the suspended first special symbol determination right, and determines whether or not it is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol in the case of a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern, etc., and indicates the determination result in advance. This is a process of generating judgment information. After that, the CPU 101 sets a pending command including the preliminary determination information in the RAM 103 (step S206). The suspension command set in step S206 is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been suspended, and is transmitted to the production control unit 130 in the output process in step S9 of FIG. In addition, in the preliminary determination process of step S205, the various random numbers acquired in step S204 may be directly generated as preliminary determination information, and the preliminary determination information may be included in the pending command.

If the determination is "NO" in step S201, if the determination is "NO" in step S202, or if the process in step S206 is executed, the CPU 101 executes the process in step S207. In step S207, the CPU 101 determines whether the second starting port switch 112 has been turned "ON" (whether or not a game ball has entered the second starting port 12). When it is determined that the second starting port switch 112 is turned "ON" (step S207: YES), the pending number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is set to the second special symbol determination stored in the ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether the maximum number of reservations for symbol determination is less than Umax2 (for example, 4) (step S208).

When the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations U2 is less than the maximum number of reservations Umax2 (step S208: YES), the CPU 101 updates the value of the number of reservations U2 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S209). Then, the CPU 101 acquires various random numbers (jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number) updated in the process of step S1, and stores them in the RAM 103 (step S210).

Then, the CPU 101 uses the various random numbers stored in the RAM 103 through the process of step S210 to execute a preliminary determination process in the same manner as the process of step S205 described above (step S211), and stores the pending command including the preliminary determination information in the RAM 103. Set (step S212).

If the determination in step S207 is "NO", if the determination in step S208 is "NO", or if the process in step S212 is performed, the CPU 101 ends the starting port switch process and performs the gate switch process. Proceed with the process.

[Gate switch processing by game control unit 100]
FIG. 7 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S3 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, the CPU 101 determines whether the gate It is determined whether the switch 114 or 115 is turned "ON" (step S301).

When the CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 or 115 is turned "ON" (step S301: YES), the number of reservations G for normal symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is equal to the maximum number of reservations Gmax for normal symbol determination (for example, , 4) is determined (step S302).

If the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations G is less than the maximum number of reservations Gmax (step S302: YES), the CPU 101 updates the number of reservations G to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S303), A normal symbol random number used for symbol determination is acquired and stored in the RAM 103 (step S304). Note that a preliminary determination process may be performed on the normal symbol random number stored in step S304 in the same manner as in step S205, and the result of the preliminary determination process may be transmitted to the performance control unit 130 as a normal symbol suspension command. .

[Special symbol processing by game control unit 100]
Next, details of the special symbol processing executed by the game control section 100 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 8 to 11. FIG. 8 is a detailed flowchart showing the special symbol processing in step S4 in FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot determination process in step S407 of FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the variation pattern setting process in step S408 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether or not a special game is being played (during a jackpot game), for example, based on information stored in the RAM 103 (step S401). If it is determined that the special game is in progress (step S401: YES), the CPU 101 ends the special symbol processing.

When determining that the special game is not in progress (step S401: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner (step S402). If it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S402: NO), it is determined whether the pending number U2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is "1" or more (step S403). ), if it is determined that it is greater than or equal to "1" (step S403: YES), "1" is subtracted from the pending number U2, and only 1 reserved ball is consumed (step S404).

If the CPU 101 determines that the pending number U2 is not greater than "1" (the second special symbol determination is not pending) (step S403: NO), the CPU 101 sets the pending number U2 of the first special symbol determination stored in the RAM 103. It is determined whether U1 is greater than or equal to "1" (step S405), and if it is determined that it is greater than or equal to "1" (step S405: YES), the number of pending balls U1 is subtracted by "1" to reduce the number of pending balls to 1. (step S406). On the other hand, if the CPU 101 determines in step S405 that the number of reservations U1 is not "1" or more (step S405: NO), the CPU 101 sets a customer waiting command in the RAM 103 and ends the special symbol processing shown in FIG.

Following the processing in step S404 or step S406, the CPU 101 executes jackpot determination processing (step S407). Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 9, the jackpot determination process will be described.

(Jackpot determination process)
As shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is a jackpot (step S431). Specifically, when determining whether or not it is a jackpot following the process of step S404 in FIG. It is determined whether the jackpot random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in advance in the ROM 102. Thereby, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot. Note that when the gaming state is a high probability gaming state, the probability of a jackpot being determined is higher than in a low probability gaming state. On the other hand, when determining whether or not there is a jackpot following the process of step S406 in FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot random number (stored in the jackpot random number) matches the winning value of the jackpot random number stored in advance in the ROM 102. Thereby, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot.

Here, if the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot (step S431: YES), the CPU 101 performs symbol random number determination processing based on the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 together with the jackpot random number described above. (Step S432). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines which of the random numbers assigned to each jackpot symbol previously stored in the ROM 102 matches the symbol random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2. Accordingly, the jackpot symbol is determined. Then, the CPU 101 sets the determined jackpot symbol in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S433).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S431 that it is not a jackpot (step S431: NO), the CPU 101 sets a loss symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a loss in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S434).

After the process of step S433 or the process of step S434, the CPU 101 ends the jackpot determination process and returns the process to the special symbol process of FIG. 8.

Returning to FIG. 8, following the jackpot determination process in step S407, the CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process (step S408). The variation pattern setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a variable probability game flag, which will be described later, is ON, that is, whether or not the game is in a high probability game state (step S461). When the variable probability game flag is OFF (step S461: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether the auxiliary game flag described later is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the auxiliary game state (step S462). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF (step S462: NO), the CPU 101 sets the normal table in the RAM 103 as the variable pattern table (step S463). When the auxiliary game flag is ON (step S462: YES), the CPU 101 sets the time saving table as a variable pattern table in the RAM 103 (step S464).

On the other hand, when the variable probability game flag is ON (step S461: YES), the CPU 101 sets the variable probability table in the RAM 103 as the variable pattern table (step S466).

The variation pattern table is a table that defines conditions for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Each fluctuation pattern table contains multiple fluctuation patterns, such as a jackpot fluctuation pattern that is selected when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, and a jackpot fluctuation pattern that is selected when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot, and a jackpot fluctuation pattern that is selected when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot, and a jackpot fluctuation pattern that is selected when the jackpot judgment result is a jackpot. (for example, when it is not decided to select a variation pattern of 13 seconds or more), the losing variation pattern (no reach) is selected, and when it is a loss and there is a reach (for example, when a variation pattern of 13 seconds or more is selected), a predetermined variation time (for example, This includes the reach variation pattern selected when it is determined to select a variation pattern of 13 seconds or more. For example, the jackpot fluctuation patterns included in the regular table include fluctuation patterns with fluctuation times of 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 80 seconds, 120 seconds, etc., and the reach fluctuation patterns included in the regular table include fluctuation times of 27 seconds. , 57 seconds, 75 seconds, 113 seconds, etc. Further, as loss variation patterns included in the normal table, there are variation patterns in which the variation time is 8 seconds, 12 seconds, etc. In addition, the time saving table and the probability variable table have a variation pattern (for example, a variation time of 2 seconds) that is shorter than the loss variation pattern in the normal table as a loss variation pattern. Note that an example of the variation pattern table of the normal table will be described later with reference to FIG. 19.

Following the processing in step S463, step S464, or step S465, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466). If the result of this jackpot determination is not a loss, that is, if it is a jackpot (step S466: NO), the CPU 101 advances the process to the next step 468.

When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination in step S407 is a loss (step S466: YES), the CPU 101 performs reach random number determination processing (step S467). In the reach random number determination process, the CPU 101 determines whether to select a reach fluctuation pattern of a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 13 seconds) or more based on the acquired reach random number. Then, following the process in step S467, the CPU 101 executes the process in step S468.

In step S468, the CPU 101 performs fluctuation pattern random number determination processing. Specifically, the CPU 101 uses the set variation pattern table to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2. More specifically, the CPU 101 determines a variation pattern in which the variation pattern random number stored in the RAM 103 in the process of step S2 matches the value set for each variation pattern included in the set variation pattern table.

In this way, the CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the variation pattern random number acquired in step S2 and the variation pattern table set in step S463, step S464, or step S465. The determined variation pattern is set in the RAM 103 as setting information (step S469). After the process in step S469, the CPU 101 ends the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 10, and proceeds to the process from step S409 onward in FIG.

Returning to FIG. 8, following the processing in step S408, the CPU 101 displays the symbol setting information set in the step S407, the fluctuation pattern setting information set in the step S408, and the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A fluctuation start command including information etc. is generated and set in the RAM 103 (step S409). This fluctuation start command is a command for instructing execution of a performance accompanying the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the performance control section 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG. 5.

Following the process in step S409, the CPU 101 starts the variable display of the special symbol based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in the process in step S409 (step S410), and measures the variation time. Start (step S411). In addition, the variable display of the special symbol is performed using the second special symbol display 42 when the processing of steps S407 to S409 is performed following the processing of step S404, and the variable display of the special symbol is performed using the second special symbol display 42 following the processing of step S406. If it is done, it is done using the first special symbol display 41.

If the CPU 101 determines "YES" in the process of step S402, or if the process of step S411 is executed, the CPU 101 calculates the variation corresponding to the variation pattern set in the process of step S408 from the start of measurement of the variation time in step S411. It is determined whether time has elapsed (step S412).

If the CPU 101 determines that the variation time has elapsed (step S412: YES), it sets a variation stop command in the RAM 103 to notify that the variation display of the special symbol will be stopped (step S413), and in the process of step S410. The started variable display of the special symbol is ended (step S414), and the measured variation time is reset (step S415). As a result, the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 stops displaying the symbol (jackpot symbol or loss symbol) according to the determination result of the jackpot determination process in step S407, and the special symbol determination The results will be announced. Note that the fluctuation stop command set in the process of step S413 is transmitted to the production control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG.

After the process in step S415, the CPU 101 executes the stopping process (step S416). Details of the stopped processing will be described later.

If the determination in step S401 is "YES", if the determination in step S405 is "NO", if the determination in step S412 is "NO", or if the process of step S416 is performed, the CPU 101 After finishing the special symbol processing, the normal symbol processing of step S5 in FIG. 5 is executed.

[Stopped processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the stopping process in step S416 in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 11 is a detailed flowchart showing the stopping process of step S416 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot based on the result of the jackpot determination processing in step S407 (step S480). When the CPU 101 determines that it is a jackpot (step S480: YES), the CPU 101 sets the jackpot game flag stored in the RAM 103 to "ON" (step S481).

Following the process of step S481, the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag and the variable probability game flag stored in the RAM 103 to "OFF" (step S482). Following the process in step S482, the CPU 101 starts the opening (step S483) and sets the opening command in the RAM 103 (step S484). This opening command is a command for causing the performance control unit 130 to perform an opening performance indicating that a jackpot game is started, and the command is a command that controls the performance by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG. 130.

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S480: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S485). If it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is set to "ON" (step S485: YES), "1" is subtracted from the remaining number of auxiliary games J stored in the RAM 103, and the corresponding J is updated (step S486). . The remaining number of auxiliary games J indicates the number of remaining changes in special symbols (the number of times special symbol determination is performed) for which the auxiliary game state is maintained, and is set in the game state setting process that is executed after the jackpot game is played. . Details of the game state setting process will be described later.

Following the process of step S486, the CPU 101 determines whether the remaining number of supplementary games J is "0" (step S487). When determining that the remaining number of supplementary games J is "0" (step S487: YES), the CPU 101 sets the supplementary game flag to "OFF" (step S488).

When the process of step S488 is executed, if it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not "ON" (step S485: NO), or if it is determined that the remaining number of auxiliary games J is not "0" (step S487: NO) ), the CPU 101 determines whether the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S489).

If it is determined that the variable probability game flag is set to "ON" (step S489: YES), the CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the remaining number of high probability games X stored in the RAM 103, and updates the X. (Step S490). The high probability game remaining number X indicates the remaining number of times special symbol determination is performed in the high probability game state, and is set in a game state setting process (described later) that is executed after the jackpot game is played.

Following the process of step S490, the CPU 101 determines whether the remaining number of high probability games X is "0" (step S491). If it is determined that the remaining number of high probability games X is "0" (step S491: YES), the variable probability game flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to "OFF" (step S492).

If the process of step S492 is executed, if the process of step S484 is executed, if it is determined that the variable probability game flag is not "ON" (step S489: NO), or if the remaining number of high probability games X is " 0'' (step S491: NO), the CPU 101 ends the stopping process in FIG.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit 100]
Next, details of the normal symbol processing executed by the game control section 100 will be explained with reference to FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a detailed flowchart showing the normal symbol processing in step S5 of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 is set to "ON" (step S501). The auxiliary flag is a flag that is set to "ON" when the result of normal symbol determination is a win, and is a flag that indicates whether or not a winning game in which the electric tulip 17 is activated is in progress. The electric tulip 17 operates in a predetermined pattern when the result of normal symbol determination is a hit. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 differs depending on whether the gaming machine 1 is in the auxiliary game state (whether the auxiliary game flag is ON or not). If it is determined that the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S501: YES), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG. 12.

If it is determined that the auxiliary flag is not set to "ON" (step S501: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbols are being displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 45 (step S502), If it is determined that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S502: NO), it is determined whether the pending number G of the normal symbol determination stored in the RAM 103 is "1" or more (step S503). If it is determined that the pending number G is not greater than "1" (step S503: NO), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG. 12.

If the CPU 101 determines that the number of reservations G is "1" or more (step S503: YES), the CPU 101 updates the number of reservations G to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S504), and executes a normal symbol random number determination process. (Step S505). Specifically, the normal symbol random number acquired in the process of step S3 above in response to the game ball passing through the first gate 15 or the second gate 16 is the winning value of the normal symbol random number stored in the ROM 102. It is determined whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit based on whether or not they match (step S506). In addition, when in the auxiliary game state, the winning value of the normal symbol random number is set to be higher than in the non-auxiliary game state, and when in the auxiliary game state, the result of the normal symbol judgment is determined to be a win. The probability of this is higher than in the non-assisted gaming state.

When the CPU 101 determines that the result of normal symbol determination is not a hit (step S506: NO), the CPU 101 sets a losing symbol in the RAM 103 (step S507).

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the result of the normal symbol determination is a win (step S506: YES), the CPU 101 sets the winning symbol in the RAM 103 (step S508).

Following the process of step S507 or step S508, the CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game state is based on whether the auxiliary game flag stored in the RAM 103 is ON (step S509).

When determining that the CPU 101 is not in the auxiliary gaming state (step S509: NO), the CPU 101 sets the normal symbol fluctuation time, which is the time for variably displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 45, to 25 seconds, for example (step S510). On the contrary, if it is determined that it is in the auxiliary game state (step S509: YES), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to a relatively short value, for example, 2 seconds (step S511). The normal symbol variation time set by the process of step S510 or step S511 is temporarily stored in the RAM 103.

Following the process of step S510 or step S511, the CPU 101 starts the fluctuating display of the normal symbols on the regular symbol display 45 (step S512), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuating display (step S513). .

On the other hand, when the CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display 45 (step S502: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not to end the variable display of the normal symbol (step S516). Specifically, the fluctuation display of the normal symbols is determined based on whether or not the elapsed time from which measurement was started in the process of step S513 has reached the normal symbol fluctuation time set in the process of step S512 or step S513. Determine whether the end timing has come. If it is determined that the end timing has not come (step S516: NO), the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol processing of FIG. 12.

If the CPU 101 determines that it is the timing to end the variable display of the normal symbols (step S516: YES), the CPU 101 ends the variable display of the normal symbols by the normal symbol display 45 (step S517). Specifically, the CPU 101 causes the normal symbol display 45 to stop display the symbol set in the process of step S507 or step S508. As a result, the result of normal symbol determination is notified.

Following the process in step S517, the CPU 101 resets the elapsed time when measurement was started in the process in step S515 (step S518). Then, similarly to step S506 above, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit (step S519), and when it is determined that it is a hit (step S519: YES), the auxiliary flag is set to "ON". settings (step S520). The electric tulip 17 is activated by setting this auxiliary flag to "ON" and performing electric tulip processing, which will be described later.

If the process of step S520 is performed, if the determination is NO in the process of step S516, or if the determination is NO in the process of step S519, the CPU 101 ends the normal symbol process of FIG.

In addition, in the non-auxiliary gaming state, there is a long open hit that opens the second starting port 12 for a long time (for example, open for 5.6 seconds), and a short open that opens the second starting port 12 for a short time (for example, opens for 0.1 seconds). It may be a hit or miss.

[Big winning opening processing by game control unit 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, details of the big winning opening process executed by the game control section 100 will be explained. FIG. 13 is a detailed flowchart showing the big winning opening process in step S6 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether the special game flag (jackpot game flag) is ON (step S601). If the special game flag is ON (step S601: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening is in progress (step S602). Here, it is determined whether or not the opening of the jackpot game started in step S483 is in progress.

If the opening is in progress (step S602: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether the opening time has elapsed (step S603). Note that the opening time varies depending on the jackpot symbol. If the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the CPU 101 sets R (indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game) to "0" according to the result of the jackpot determination process, and also sets the value of Rmax, The opening pattern (opening time, number of openings, interval time, etc.) of the big prize opening 13 is set (step S604).

Here, the value of Rmax differs depending on the jackpot symbol. Although details will be described later, the number of rounds varies depending on the jackpot symbol, and the CPU 101 sets Rmax indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game according to the jackpot symbol.

Following step S604, the CPU 101 adds "1" to R and stores it in the RAM 103 (step S605). Next, the CPU 101 starts controlling the opening of the big prize opening 13 based on the opening pattern set in step S604 (step S606), and sets a round start command indicating the start of the round in the RAM 103 (step S607). After the process in step S607, the CPU 101 next executes the process in step S611.

On the other hand, if the opening is not in progress (step S602: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether the ending is in progress (step S608). If ending is in progress (step S608: YES), the CPU 101 next executes the process of step S617. If the ending is not in progress (step S608: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the interval between round games (step S609). If the interval is in progress (step S609: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether or not the interval time has elapsed (step S610), and if it has elapsed (step S610: YES), then the CPU 101 executes the process of step S605. Execute. If the interval time has not elapsed (step S610: NO), the CPU 101 ends the big winning opening process.

On the other hand, if the interval is not in progress (step S609: NO), that is, if the round game is in progress, the CPU 101 determines whether the round end condition is satisfied (step S611). If the round end condition is not satisfied (step S611: NO), the CPU 101 ends the big winning opening process.

For example, the round end condition for the long open round game described later is that, for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the opening control of the big prize opening of this round was started in step S606, or that This means that the number of winnings of game balls into the big winning hole after starting the opening control of the winning hole has reached a predetermined value. If either of these two conditions is met, the CPU 101 determines that the round end condition has been met.

If the round end condition is satisfied (step S611: YES), the CPU 101 ends the opening control of the big prize opening in this round (step S612). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets a round end command (step S613). This round end command is transmitted to the production control unit 130 by executing the output process of step S9 in FIG.

Subsequently, the CPU 101 determines whether R is equal to Rmax (step S614). That is, the CPU 101 determines whether the current round is equal to the maximum number of rounds set in step S604.

If it is determined that R is not equal to Rmax (step S614: NO), the CPU 101 starts measuring the interval time (step S615), and then ends the big winning opening process.

If it is determined that R is equal to Rmax (step S614: YES), the CPU 101 starts the ending (step S616) and sets the ending command in the RAM 103 (step S617).

When the CPU 101 performs the process of step S617 or determines YES in the process of step S608, the CPU 101 determines whether or not a preset ending time has elapsed since starting the ending in step S616 (step S618). If the ending time has elapsed (step S618: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether the jackpot game flag is ON, that is, whether or not the current special game is a jackpot game (step S619). When the jackpot game flag is ON, the CPU 101 executes a game state setting process (step S620). Details of the gaming state setting process will be described later. When the game state setting process in step S620 is executed, or when the determination is NO in step S619, the CPU 101 sets the special game flag (jackpot game flag) to OFF (step S621).

If NO is determined in the process of step S601, NO is determined in the process of step S611, NO is determined in the process of step S618, NO is determined in the process of step S603. If it is determined that step S615 is executed, or if step S621 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the big winning opening process shown in FIG. 13.

[Game state setting processing by game control unit 100]
Next, the game state setting process of step S620 in FIG. 13 will be explained. FIG. 14 is a detailed flowchart showing the gaming state setting process of step S620 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 101 determines whether the type of the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot that involves transition to a high probability gaming state (step S630). Specifically, the CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot based on the symbols set in the jackpot determination process. If it is a probability variable jackpot (step S630: YES), the CPU 101 sets the probability variable game flag and the auxiliary game flag to ON (step S631), sets the remaining number of high probability games X to Xmax, and sets the remaining number of auxiliary games. Jmax is set in J (step S632). Xmax and Jmax are predetermined values, and very large values, for example 10,000, are set as Xmax and Jmax. Since a very large value Xmax is set for X, the game is effectively controlled in a high probability game state until the next jackpot occurs.

When the process of step S632 is performed, or when the determination is NO in step S630, the CPU 101 determines whether the current jackpot is a normal jackpot accompanied by a transition to the time-saving gaming state (step S633). If the determination is YES in step S633, the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary game flag to ON (step S634). Subsequently, the CPU 101 sets the remaining number of auxiliary games J to, for example, "100" (step S635).

If the process of step S635 is performed, or if the determination is NO in step S633, the CPU 101 ends the gaming state setting process shown in FIG.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit 100]
Next, details of the electric tulip process in step S7 in FIG. 5 will be described. FIG. 15 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip process of FIG.

First, the CPU 101 of the game control unit 100 determines whether the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S701). If it is determined that the auxiliary flag is not set to "ON" (step S701: NO), the CPU 101 ends the electric tulip process.

If the CPU 101 determines that the auxiliary flag is set to "ON" (step S701: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether the electric tulip 17 is in operation (step S702). If it is determined that the electric tulip 17 is not in operation (step S702: NO), the CPU 101 determines whether the auxiliary game flag is ON or not, thereby determining whether or not the auxiliary game state is present (step S703).

When determining that the CPU 101 is not in the auxiliary game state (step S703: NO), the CPU 101 sets in the RAM 103 an operation pattern in which, for example, the operation of opening the second starting port 12 for 0.1 seconds is performed once (step S704).

On the other hand, when determining that the CPU 101 is in the auxiliary game state (step S703: YES), the CPU 101 sets an operation pattern in which, for example, the operation of opening the second starting port 12 for 1.8 seconds is performed three times as the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17. It is set in the RAM 103 (step S705).

After setting the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 through the processing in step S704 or step S705, the CPU 101 causes the electric tulip opening/closing unit 113 to start operating the electric tulip 17 in the set operation pattern (step S706).

When the CPU 101 executes the process of step S706 or determines that the electric tulip 17 is in operation (step S702: YES), the CPU 101 determines whether the operation of the electric tulip 17 started in the process of step S706 has been completed. (Step S707). If it is determined that the operation of the electric tulip 17 has been completed (step S707: YES), the CPU 101 sets the auxiliary flag stored in the RAM 103 to "OFF" (step S708).

If the determination is NO in the process of step S701, if the determination is NO in the process of step S707, or if the process of step S708 is executed, the CPU 101 ends the electric tulip process.

[Type of jackpot]
Next, the jackpot symbol (type of jackpot) that is selected when the result of the special game determination is a jackpot will be explained. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the details of the jackpot symbols selected according to winnings in each starting hole, and is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot game corresponding to each symbol.

As shown in FIG. 16, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 and it becomes a jackpot, one of the jackpot symbols Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. Then, a jackpot game (a type of special game) is played according to each jackpot symbol. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 12 and becomes a jackpot, any one of the jackpot symbols Z4 to Z6 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and each jackpot symbol A jackpot game (a type of special game) is played depending on the game.

Specifically, when a jackpot is determined based on the winning in the first starting opening 11, the jackpot symbol Z1 is selected as the jackpot symbol at a rate of 15%, and the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected at a rate of 50%. , jackpot symbol Z3 is selected at a rate of 35%.

When the jackpot symbol Z1 is selected, the jackpot game is played under a predetermined round end condition (for example, until the number of winning game balls in the jackpot 13 reaches 10, or after the jackpot 13 is opened) The long open round game in which the big prize opening 13 is opened is played 10 times (10 rounds (denoted as "R")) until the time period (until 29.5 seconds elapses) is satisfied. For example, in a 10R jackpot game, about 1500 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, when the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected, a 4R long open round game is performed as a jackpot game. After the jackpot symbol Z1 or the jackpot symbol Z2 is selected and a jackpot game is performed, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a variable probability gaming state (high probability gaming state and auxiliary gaming state), and essentially plays a variable probability game until the next jackpot. The condition continues.

The jackpot due to the jackpot symbol Z1 is referred to as a "10R definite variable jackpot", and the jackpot due to the jackpot symbol Z2 is referred to as a "4R probable variable jackpot".

Further, when the jackpot symbol Z3 is selected, a 4R long open round game is played. After the jackpot symbol Z3 is selected and the jackpot game is played, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a low probability gaming state and an auxiliary gaming state (time-saving gaming state). The time-saving gaming state continues until the special symbol has changed 100 times, and when the 100th special symbol has changed, the gaming machine 1 is returned to the normal gaming state. Incidentally, the jackpot due to jackpot symbol Z3 is sometimes referred to as "4R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, when a jackpot is determined based on the winning in the second starting opening 12, jackpot symbol Z4 is selected at a rate of 40%, jackpot symbol Z5 is selected at a rate of 25%, and jackpot is selected at a rate of 35%. Design Z6 is selected.

When the jackpot symbol Z4 or Z5 is selected, after the jackpot game, the state shifts to a variable probability game state. The variable probability gaming state substantially continues until the next jackpot. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol Z6 is selected, the game shifts to a time-saving game state after the jackpot game, and the time-saving game state continues until the special symbol changes 100 times.

The jackpot symbol Z4 is a symbol indicating the above-mentioned 10R probability variable jackpot, and is a jackpot in which a long open round game of 10R is played. The jackpot symbol Z5 is a symbol indicating the above-mentioned 4R probability variable jackpot, and is a jackpot in which a 4R long open round game is played. Further, the jackpot symbol Z6 is a symbol indicating a 4R normal jackpot.

(Explanation of variable effects and reach effects)
Here, the variable performance and reach performance will be explained. "Fluctuation performance" is a performance that is performed while the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is fluctuating, and starts when the special symbol begins to fluctuate and ends when the special symbol ends. It is a performance that The variable effects include effects using decorative patterns displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "liquid crystal screen 5"), effects using other images, and sounds output from the speaker 24. , a performance using the movable accessory 7 , a performance using the board lamp 25 and a frame lamp 37 , and a performance using the performance button 26 .

The "reach effect" is an effect using decorative patterns displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and is an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot. Although specifically described later, decorative symbols are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 that change in response to the start of the variation of the special symbol and stop in response to the end of the variation in the special symbol. The decorative pattern is a display (corresponding display) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern being executed. Depending on the manner in which the decorative symbols stop, it is reported whether the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot or a loss. Specifically, three decorative patterns on the left, middle, and right are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5.

In response to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, the three decorative symbols begin to fluctuate, and if all three decorative symbols of the same type stop together (for example, "777" or "444"), a jackpot has been announced. . Note that the state in which three decorative patterns of the same type are aligned is called "zoro-me" or "design alignment." On the other hand, if the machine stops without three decorative patterns of the same type being aligned, it basically means that a loss has been announced. The ready-to-reach performance is a performance that makes the player expect that three decorative symbols of the same type will line up.

For example, a reach effect is an effect in which decorative symbols of the same type temporarily stop on the left and right, and the decorative symbols fluctuate in the middle area. It is a performance that leaves people with high expectations.

In this embodiment, there are three types of reach effects: normal reach effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "N reach"), SP reach effect, and SPSP reach effect. The N reach performance is a performance with the lowest possibility (also referred to as expectation level or reliability) of a subsequent jackpot among the multiple reach performances. For example, the expectation level for N reach performance is 0.1% or less. Note that as the N reach performance, there may be a plurality of N reach performances with different (or the same) performance times and/or expectations.

The SP reach performance has higher expectations than the N reach performance, and is a reach performance that takes longer than the N reach performance. For example, the expectation level for SP reach performance is 5 to 10%. Note that there may be a plurality of SP ready-to-reach performances as the SP ready-to-reach performances. The degree of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on each SP reach performance, and the performance time may also differ. It may be configured such that the longer the performance time of the SP reach performance, the higher the expectation level.

The SPSP reach performance is a performance with higher expectations than the SP reach performance, and is a reach performance with a longer performance time than the SP reach performance. For example, the expectation level for SPSP reach performance is 30 to 50%. Note that there may be a plurality of SPSP reach effects as the SPSP reach effect. The degree of expectation of a jackpot differs depending on each SPSP reach performance, and the performance time may also differ. It may be configured such that the longer the performance time of the SPSP reach performance, the higher the expectation level.

(Aspects of decorative designs)
Here, the aspect of the decorative pattern may change depending on the performance section in the variable performance. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative pattern. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the game state and the decorative symbols in each production section.

The decorative patterns 55 include, for example, decorative patterns represented by numbers from "1" to "9". In FIG. 17, as an example of the decorative pattern 55, a "1" symbol which is an odd numbered symbol and a "4" symbol which is an even numbered symbol are shown. As shown in FIG. 17, the decorative pattern 55 has two modes: a mode with a character consisting of a number image 552 and a character image 551 corresponding to the number, and a mode without character, which includes the number image 552 and does not include the character image 551. There is. The numbers indicated by the decorative pattern 55 and the character images included in the decorative pattern 55 have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, the "1" symbol corresponds to the first character, and the "4" symbol corresponds to the fourth character.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal game state, before the reach (the period from the start of the special symbol fluctuation until the reach is established), the size is "medium" (normal) and the decoration in the character mode is A symbol 55 is displayed. Further, even during the N reach performance after the reach is established, the decorative pattern 55 of size "medium" and character presence mode is displayed. In addition, if the variation of the special symbol ends without a reach, the mode of the decorative symbol 55 is "medium" in size and the mode with character from the start of variation to the stop of variation of the special symbol. It is.

Furthermore, as will be specifically described later, the SP reach effect may be performed after the N reach effect is performed. During this SP reach performance, the appearance of the left and right decorative patterns 55 changes to a “small” size and no character appearance. Note that the SP ready-to-reach effect may be performed without performing the N-ready-to-reach effect from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern 55. In this case as well, the left and right decorative patterns 55 during the SP ready-to-reach presentation are of a "small" size and have no character.

In addition, the SPSP ready-to-reach effect may be performed after the SP ready-to-reach effect is performed. The appearance of the left and right decorative symbols 55 during this SPSP reach performance is "small" in size and has no character. Note that after the N reach performance is performed, the SP SP reach performance may be performed without being performed. Furthermore, there may be a case where the SP SP ready-to-reach effect is performed without the N ready-to-reach effect and the SP ready-to-reach effect being performed from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol 55. Also in this case, the appearance of the left and right decorative symbols 55 during the SPSP reach performance is "small" in size and has no character.

Then, after the SPSP reach performance, a win or loss notification (win notification or loss notification) is performed. During the winning notification, the aspect of the decorative pattern 55 changes. Although the details will be described later, during a predetermined period during the winning notification (for example, during the first light emitting effect described later), the decorative pattern 55 has a "large" size and is displayed without a character. In addition, except for the predetermined period during the winning notification, the decorative pattern 55 has a "medium" size and is displayed in a character-less format (or a character-present format). For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 55 has a medium size and is displayed in a character-like manner. During the loss notification, the decorative pattern 55 has a "medium" size and is displayed in a character mode.

Note that there may be cases where a win or loss notification (win notification or loss notification) is performed from the SP reach effect. Even when the winning notification is performed from the SP ready-to-win performance, the aspect of the decorative pattern 55 may change during the winning notification, similar to the case where the winning notification is performed from the SPSP ready-to-win performance.

On the other hand, in the case of the variable probability game state, before the reach, the decorative pattern 55 has a "medium" size and is displayed in a characterless manner. Although details will be described later, in the case of a variable probability game state, a battle performance is executed when a reach is achieved. The battle performance is a performance that makes the player expect whether or not the variable probability game state will continue in the variable probability game state, or whether the variable probability game state will change to the variable probability game state in the time saving game state, in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. It's a performance. When a victory performance in which an ally character wins in a battle performance in a variable probability game state or a time-saving game state is performed, a jackpot game is performed, and after the jackpot game, the state shifts to a variable probability game state. On the other hand, if a defeat performance in which an ally character loses is performed in a battle performance in a variable game state (or a time-saving game state), a jackpot game is performed, and after the jackpot game, the time-saving game state shifts to the time-saving game state (or the time-saving game state continues). do). Note that as a result of the battle performance, a draw performance may be performed in which an ally character and an enemy character are drawn. The draw performance is a performance that indicates that the result of the special game determination is a loss, and is a performance that indicates that the current gaming state will continue.

During battle performance, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a "small" size and without a character. During the victory performance after the battle performance has been performed, the aspect of the decorative pattern 55 may change. Specifically, during a predetermined period in the victory performance after the battle performance (for example, during the first light emission performance described later), the decorative pattern 55 has a "large" size and is displayed in a characterless manner. Furthermore, outside of the predetermined period in the victory performance, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a "medium" size and without a character. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 55 is of medium size and is displayed without a character. During the defeat performance after the battle performance and during the draw performance, the decorative pattern 55 has a "medium" size and is displayed without a character.

(Example of fluctuation pattern)
Next, an example of a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols will be explained. First, the variation pattern of special symbols in the normal game state will be explained with reference to FIG.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of special symbols in the normal gaming state. FIG. 19(a) is a table used when the result of special symbol determination is a jackpot, and is a normal jackpot variation pattern table used to select a jackpot variation pattern. FIG. 19(b) is a normal reach variation pattern table used to select a reach variation pattern, and when the result of special symbol determination is a loss, the reach variation pattern is used to select a reach variation pattern for a predetermined time or more using a reach random number. Used when it is determined that it is selected. FIG. 19(c) is a normal loss fluctuation pattern table used to select a loss fluctuation pattern, and when the result of special symbol determination is a loss, the reach random number is used to determine the fluctuation time for a predetermined time or more. Used when it is determined not to select.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), the jackpot variation pattern table includes jackpot variation patterns OP1 (variation time 30 seconds), OP2 (variation time 60 seconds), OP3 (variation time 80 seconds), and OP4 ( (variation time: 120 seconds). When fluctuation patterns are selected based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern table, jackpot fluctuation pattern OP1 is selected at a rate of 0.5%, jackpot fluctuation pattern OP2 is selected at a rate of 4.5%, and jackpot fluctuation pattern OP3 is selected at a rate of 4.5%. It is selected at a rate of 20%, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP4 is selected at a rate of 75%.

When the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP1 is selected, the performance control unit 130 performs a variable performance including a normal reach performance as a reach performance. Specifically, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP1 is selected, three decorative symbols start to fluctuate in response to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and then the same type of decorative symbols on the left and right temporarily stop and an N reach effect is performed. .

In addition, before the N reach performance is started (or after it is started), a pseudo fluctuation performance (pseudo series) may be performed according to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance as variation patterns in which variation effects including the N reach effect and the pseudo variation effect are performed. Here, the pseudo series is an effect in which at least one of the three decorative patterns 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5 temporarily stops and changes again. Temporary stop is a state in which the decorative pattern 55 does not completely stop but slightly fluctuates (for example, swings up and down). A case where the decorative pattern 55 does not change again is sometimes referred to as "no pseudo". Furthermore, when the decorative pattern 55 re-varies once or more, the first re-fluctuation may be referred to as "pseudo 2" and the second re-fluctuation may be referred to as "pseudo 3". The higher the number of pseudo-runs, the higher the confidence that you will hit the jackpot later. For example, before a reach is established (the decorative patterns 55 of the same type are temporarily stopped on the left and right sides), one or more pseudo fluctuation effects (re-variations) may be performed, and then the N reach effect may be started. Alternatively, a reach may be established without performing a pseudo-variation performance, and then a pseudo-variation performance may be performed one or more times, a reach is established again, and an N reach performance may be started. Also, before a reach is established, one or more pseudo-variation effects are performed, then a reach is established, and then one or more pseudo-variation effects are performed, a reach is established again, and a reach effect is achieved. May be performed. Note that the pseudo-connection may be performed without temporarily stopping any of the three decorative patterns 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5. In this case, while the three decorative patterns 55 are changing, an image suggesting a pseudo-sequence is temporarily stopped on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the pseudo-sequence is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(a), when the jackpot variation pattern OP2 is selected, the performance control unit 130 performs a variable performance including an SP reach performance as a reach performance. Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern OP2 is selected, the three decorative symbols 55 start varying in response to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach effect is performed, and then the SP reach effect is performed. In addition, a plurality of variation patterns in which variable performances including SP ready-to-reach performances are performed may be prepared, and one or more pseudo-variable performances may be performed in the variable performances including SP ready-to-reach performances.

Further, when the jackpot variation pattern OP3 is selected, the production control unit 130 performs a variation production including a special production. Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern OP3 is selected, the three decorative symbols 55 start varying in response to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach effect is performed, then the SP reach effect is performed, and then Afterwards, a special performance will take place. The special performance is a performance that makes the player expect that a special symbol indicating a jackpot will stop on the liquid crystal screen 5. Details of the special effects will be described later. Note that a plurality of variation patterns in which a variation performance including a special performance is performed may be prepared, and in the variation performance including the special performance, a pseudo variation performance may be performed one or more times.

Further, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern OP4 is selected, the performance control unit 130 performs a variable performance including an SPSP reach performance as a reach performance. Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern OP4 is selected, the three decorative symbols 55 start varying in response to the start of variation of the special symbols, the N reach effect is performed, then the SP reach effect is performed, and then After that, the SPSP reach effect will be performed. In addition, a plurality of variation patterns in which variable performances including SPSP ready-to-reach performances are performed may be prepared, and pseudo-variable performances may be performed one or more times in the variable performances including SPSP ready-to-reach performances.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19(b), the reach variation pattern table includes reach variation patterns RP1 (variation time 27 seconds), RP2 (variation time 57 seconds), RP3 (variation time 75 seconds), RP4 (variation time 113 seconds) is included. When variation patterns are selected based on the reach variation pattern table, reach variation pattern RP1 is selected at a rate of 50%, reach variation pattern RP2 is selected at a rate of 25%, and reach variation pattern RP3 is selected at a rate of 15%. and reach variation pattern RP4 is selected at a rate of 10%.

When the reach fluctuation pattern RP1 is selected, the performance control unit 130 performs a variable performance including an N reach performance as a reach performance. When the reach variation pattern RP2 is selected, the performance control unit 130 performs a variable performance including an SP reach performance as a reach performance. When the reach variation pattern RP3 is selected, the production control unit 130 performs a variation production including a special production. When the reach fluctuation pattern RP4 is selected, the performance control unit 130 performs a variable performance including an SPSP reach performance as a reach performance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(c), when the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the loss fluctuation pattern table, if the value of the pending number U1 is "2" or less, the loss fluctuation pattern HP1 (variation time 8 seconds) is selected with a probability of 80%, and loss variation pattern HP2 (variation time of 12 seconds) is selected with a probability of 20%. Further, when a variation pattern is selected based on the loss variation pattern table, if the value of the pending number U1 is "3", the loss variation pattern HP3 (variation time 3 seconds) is selected at a rate of 100%.

As described above, when it is determined that there is a jackpot, the SPSP reach effect is likely to be performed, and the N reach effect is difficult to be performed. Furthermore, when it is determined that the player loses, the SPSP reach effect is difficult to perform, and the N reach effect is likely to be performed. For this reason, if the SPSP reach effect is performed, there is a relatively high possibility of a jackpot after that, and if the N reach effect is performed, the possibility of a jackpot after that is relatively low, and a jackpot The reliability of the results increases in the order of N reach performance, SP reach performance, and SPSP reach performance.

Further, the jackpot variation pattern may include a variation pattern that does not include a reach effect. When such a variation pattern is selected, a hit effect in which three decorative symbols 55 are aligned and a jackpot is announced is performed without performing a reach effect. In addition, in a fluctuating performance in which a hit performance is performed, a reach is established and an N reach performance is performed, and the screen suddenly switches to a pattern alignment in which three decorative patterns 55 are aligned or an accessory action in which the movable accessory 7 is activated. A jackpot may be announced through a performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the variation pattern of special symbols in the variable probability gaming state will be explained.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of special symbols in a variable probability gaming state. FIG. 20(a) is a table used when the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, and is a jackpot fluctuation pattern table when the probability changes, which is used to select a jackpot fluctuation pattern. FIG. 20(b) is a probability variable reach variation pattern table used when it is determined that a variation time longer than a predetermined time is selected using a reach random number when the result of special symbol determination is a loss. FIG. 20(c) is a table used when it is determined not to select a variation time longer than a predetermined time using a reach random number when the result of special symbol determination is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), when a jackpot is determined in the first special symbol determination in the variable probability gaming state and jackpot symbol Z1 is selected, variation pattern OP5-1 (variation time 65 seconds) is selected. Further, when jackpot symbol Z2 is selected, variation pattern OP5-2 (variation time 60 seconds) is selected. Further, when a jackpot is determined in the first special symbol determination in the variable probability gaming state and jackpot symbol Z3 is selected, variation pattern OP6 (variation time 53 seconds) is selected. Further, when a jackpot is determined in the second special symbol determination during the probability variable gaming state and jackpot symbol Z4 is selected, variation pattern OP5-1 (variation time 65 seconds) is selected. Further, when jackpot symbol Z5 is selected, variation pattern OP5-2 (variation time 60 seconds) is selected. In addition, when it is determined to be a jackpot in the second special symbol determination during the probability variable gaming state and the jackpot symbol Z6 is selected, the variation pattern OP6 (variation time 53 seconds) is selected.

When the variation pattern OP5-1 or OP5-2 is selected, the performance control section 130 performs a winning performance. In addition, when the variable pattern OP5-1 is selected, the player is informed that it is a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot that is more advantageous for the player in the winning effect, and the winning effect is more favorable than the winning effect that is executed when the variable pattern OP5-2 is selected. There will also be spectacular performances. Further, when the variation pattern OP6 is selected, the effect control section 130 performs a defeat effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20(b), the reach variation pattern table used in the variable probability gaming state includes the reach variation pattern RP5 (variation time 50 seconds). When the reach variation pattern RP5 is selected, the performance control section 130 performs a draw performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20(c), the loss fluctuation pattern table used in the variable probability gaming state includes the loss fluctuation pattern HP4-1 (variation time 15 2 seconds), and loss variation patterns HP4-2 (variation time 2 seconds) and HP4-3 (variation time 15 seconds) that are selected based on winnings in the second starting opening 12. The loss fluctuation pattern HP4-2 is selected when the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more, and the loss fluctuation pattern HP4-3 is selected when the number of reservations U2 is "0".

In addition, when in the time-saving gaming state, the same variation pattern table as in the variable probability gaming state may be used as a variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, or a variation pattern table different from that in the variable probability gaming state may be used. It's okay to be hit.

(Production during hit notification)
Next, the performance during winning notification in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. Here, in this embodiment, a light emitting effect is performed on the decorative pattern on the liquid crystal screen 5. The light emitting effect in this embodiment is a effect in which an effect image (an image representing light emission, lightning, sparks, etc.) in which decorative patterns appear to shine is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. Note that the effect image representing light may be an effect display in which light is emitted or may be an effect display in which light is absorbed, as long as it is an image used to enhance the visual effect. The light emitting effect performed during the winning notification is called the winning light emitting effect. Hereinafter, the winning light emission effect will be explained. First, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24, the winning notification performed after the SPSP reach effect in the normal gaming state will be explained.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the flow of variable effects including SPSP reach effects. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing details of the winning notification performed as a result of the SPSP reach effect. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including the SPSP reach effect shown in FIG. 22 is performed. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the screen when a winning notification is performed, which is an effect subsequent to FIG. 23. As described above, the variation performance including the SPSP reach performance is executed when the variation pattern OP4 or RP4 is selected.

FIG. 23(A) shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends. In FIG. 23(A), three decorative patterns 55 are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. Further, in FIG. 23(A), a normal background image is displayed. As shown in the figure, each of the three decorative patterns 55 has a "medium" size and is in the form of a character. Further, in the lower area of the liquid crystal screen 5, a plurality of reservation icons 51 indicating reservation of the right to determine the first special symbol are displayed. A maximum of four pending icons 51 are displayed. The hold icon 51 is basically displayed in white, and when the reliability is relatively high, it is displayed in a color other than white that suggests a high or low reliability (for example, blue, green, red, zebra, and rainbow color). (It may be displayed from the beginning or may change during the process.) The color of the hold icon 51 is determined by the performance control unit 130 by random number lottery based on the result of preliminary determination.

Further, a changing icon 53 indicating the current change in the first special symbol is displayed in the lower central area of the screen. In this embodiment, the earliest pending icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53. Therefore, the color of the changing icon 53 is basically the same as that of the pending icon 51. Note that the changing icon 53 may change to a color (for example, blue, green, red, zebra, or rainbow color) that indicates the reliability level of the pending icon 51 or higher. The color of the changing icon 53 is determined by the performance control unit 130 by random number lottery based on the result of special symbol determination.

Further, a small pattern 56 is displayed at the lower left of the screen. The small symbol 56 includes three numerical symbols, changes according to the variation of the special symbol, and stops according to the stop of the special symbol. The small pattern 56 is displayed while the decorative pattern 55 is hidden while the special pattern is changing (for example, while a cut-in image is displayed on the entire screen, when SPSP reaches, or when a predetermined high-reliability pattern is displayed). It is displayed even during screen switching when the performance starts, etc.). In this embodiment, no color is added to the small pattern 56 to indicate the level of reliability.

Further, a fourth symbol 57 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed at the right end of the screen. The fourth symbol 57 is a symbol for performance that fluctuates and stops in accordance with the fluctuation and stop of the first special symbol, and is always variably displayed on the screen while the first special symbol is fluctuating. Further, a fourth symbol 59 corresponding to the second special symbol is also displayed. The fourth symbol 59 is a symbol for performance that fluctuates and stops in accordance with the fluctuation and stop of the second special symbol, and is always variably displayed on the screen while the second special symbol is fluctuating. In this embodiment, the fourth symbols 57 and 59 notify the result of the special symbol determination based on the color in the stopped state. In addition, the fluctuation of the fourth symbols 57 and 59 is, for example, when images of colors (for example, red, blue, yellow) for notifying the result of special symbol determination are repeated in order for a certain period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds). This is achieved by displaying the In this embodiment, reliability is not suggested by the changing colors of the fourth symbols 57 and 59. Furthermore, no color is added to the fourth symbols 57, 59 to indicate the level of reliability. Note that the fourth symbols 57 and 59 may be displayed using other display means (for example, LED) provided around the liquid crystal screen 5, for example.

Further, at the lower right of the screen, a pending number 52 indicating the pending number of first special symbol determination and second special symbol determination is displayed. The pending numbers 52 include a number on the left side indicating the number of pendings for the first special symbol determination, and a number on the right side indicating the number of pendings for the second special symbol determination. Note that this pending number 52 is always displayed on the screen while the special symbols are changing. In this embodiment, the pending numerals 52 do not indicate whether the reliability is high or low, and no color is added to the pending numerals 52 to indicate whether the reliability is high or low.

The pending icon 51, the changing icon 53, the small symbol 56, the pending number 52, and the fourth symbols 57 and 59 are displayed in different locations. These images are always displayed in front of other images, so they are not obscured by other images. Specifically, for example, even if an effect image (effect images 61 and 62 to be described later) related to a winning lighting effect is displayed, at least the small symbol 56, the pending number 52, and the fourth symbol 57, 59 are displayed with the effect. The images do not overlap, and the small symbols 56, reserved numerals 52, and fourth symbols 57 and 59 do not become invisible, nor do their visibility deteriorate. The same applies to the case where the pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are displayed during the winning light emission effect. In addition, even when effect images related to the reach light effect, non-reach light effect, and chance eye light effect, which will be described later, are displayed, the pending icon 51, the changing icon 53, the small symbol 56, the pending number 52, and the fourth symbol are displayed. 57 and 59 are not covered with the effect image, the small pattern 56, the reserved numeral 52, and the fourth pattern 57 and 59 do not become invisible, nor do their visibility deteriorate.

In this embodiment, the sizes of the decorative pattern 55, the changing icon 53, the pending icon 51, the small pattern 56, the pending numeral 52, and the fourth symbols 57 and 59 are decreased in this order. Note that the changing icon 53 and the pending icon 51 may have the same size. Moreover, the small pattern 56 may be larger than the pending icon 51 (or the changing icon 53), or may be the same size as the pending icon 51 (or the changing icon 53). Further, the reserved number 52 and the fourth symbols 57, 59 may be the same size, or the reserved number 52 may be smaller than the fourth symbols 57, 59.

When the first special symbol determination is performed in the game control unit 100 and the variation pattern OP4 or RP4 is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the first special symbol display 41 starts to display the first special symbol in a variable manner. At the same time, a variation start command including the variation pattern OP4 or RP4 is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the performance control unit 130. In response to receiving this variation start command, the effect control unit 130 starts varying the three decorative patterns 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5 (t0 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(B)). Further, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the plurality of hold icons 51 each move to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 51 is displayed as a changing icon 53. Further, in response to reception of the fluctuation start command, the number of reservations indicated by the reservation number 52 decreases.

During the period from the start of variation of the decorative symbol 55 to the establishment of a ready-to-reach (between t0 and t1 in FIG. 21 and between (B) and (C) in FIG. 23), a pre-ready-to-reach performance is performed. In the pre-reach performance, in response to receiving the fluctuation start command, the three decorative patterns 55 that have been stopped and displayed (the decorative patterns 55 that are "medium" in size and have a character) start to fluctuate. The situation will be displayed. After the three decorative patterns 55 start to fluctuate, the three decorative patterns 55 rapidly fluctuate in the same manner as when the fluctuations started (that is, the size is "medium" and there is a character). In addition, in the pre-reach performance, a preview performance (display of a preview image or a performance that moves the movable accessory 7) that suggests the possibility of a jackpot is performed, and a pseudo-variation performance that pseudo-varies the decorative pattern 55 is performed. I get hurt.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the movement of the three decorative symbols 55, the decorative symbols 55 of the same type on the left and right sides temporarily stop and reach is established (t1 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(C)). For example, before a reach is established, the left decorative symbol 55 of the three decorative symbols 55 moves slowly from the top of the screen and temporarily stops in the left area of the screen, and then the right decorative symbol 55 moves slowly from the top of the screen and temporarily stops in the left area of the screen. Move slowly and temporarily stop in the area on the right side of the screen. Then, a sound indicating that a reach has been established is outputted, and an image indicating that a reach has been established is displayed. At this time, the small symbols 56 are not displayed in a ready-to-reach manner, but are displayed in a state where the three small symbols are fluctuating. Note that when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a ready-to-reach manner, the small symbol 56 may also be displayed in a ready-to-reach manner.

An overview of the reach effect will be described below, but details of the reach effect after the reach effect is established will be described later.

When the reach is established, the N reach effect is performed (t1 to t2 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(D)). During the N reach performance, the decorative pattern 55 in the medium area is displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the screen while the decorative pattern 55 in the left and right size is "medium" and in the character mode is temporarily stopped. (FIGS. 23(D) and (E)). This makes the player expect that the decorative patterns 55 of the same type on the left and right sides will stop in the middle area. Also, during the N reach effect, a normal background image is displayed.

After the N reach performance, an SP development performance that suggests development into an SP reach performance is performed (t2 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(F)). For example, at the end of the N reach performance, a performance is performed in which the decorative pattern 55 in the medium area moves slowly and stops in the medium area, and the speed of the decorative pattern 55 in the medium area increases (as shown in FIG. 21). t2), the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area changes at high speed again to perform the SP development effect. When the SP development effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 23(F), for example, the left and right decorative patterns 55 move to the left and right at the top of the screen while shrinking. At this time, the character images added to the left and right decorative patterns 55 are separated and changed to a characterless mode. That is, in the SP development performance, the left and right decorative patterns 55 change from a mode in which the size is "medium" and a character is present to a mode in which the size is "small" and there is no character.

After the SP development performance is performed, the SP reach performance is started (t3 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(G)). During the SP reach performance, the left and right decorative patterns 55 are "small" in size and temporarily stop on the left and right sides of the screen in a characterless manner, and a video performance corresponding to the SP reach performance is performed in the center of the screen. . Further, during the SP ready-to-reach performance, an SP background image for the SP ready-to-reach performance is displayed. During the SP reach performance, a performance that makes the player expect a big win is performed. For example, in the SP reach effect, an effect in which a 2D anime character performs a predetermined action is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 23(G), after the SP reach effect is started, the pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are hidden. Note that during the SP reach performance, the pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be continuously displayed, or only the pending icon 51 may be hidden, and the changing icon 53 may be continuously displayed.

When the SP reach effect ends, an SPSP development effect indicating that the SPSP reach effect will develop is performed (t4 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23 (H)). For example, in the SPSP development performance, a title related to the SPSP reach performance to be executed may be displayed. The display style of this title may suggest the reliability of the jackpot.

After the SPSP development performance is performed, the SPSP reach performance is started (t5 in FIG. 21, FIG. 23(I)). For example, during the SPSP reach effect, the decorative patterns 55 on the left and right sides are displayed temporarily stopped on the left and right sides of the screen in a "small" size and without characters, and in the center of the screen, a jackpot is shown to the player. A promising 3D video will be displayed. Further, during the SPSP reach effect, an SPSP background image for the SPSP reach effect is displayed. In addition, the pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be continuously displayed during the SP SP reach effect, or even if the pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are hidden according to the start of the SPSP reach effect. Alternatively, only the hold icon 51 may be hidden.

When the SPSP reach effect is performed for a predetermined period of time, a win/loss notification is performed to notify whether or not it is a jackpot as a result of the SPSP reach effect (t7 in FIG. 21). Specifically, at the final stage of the SPSP reach performance and immediately before the notification of winning or losing, a deciding performance is performed (t6 in FIGS. 21 and 22, and FIG. 24 (J)). For example, in the deciding performance, as shown in FIG. 24(J), an operation promotion performance is performed that prompts the player to operate the performance button 26. The operation promotion effect includes an operation promotion image 65 and a valid period image 651 indicating a valid period of operation on the effect button 26. Then, in response to the operation on the production button 26 being performed, or in response to the elapse of the effective time of the operation, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol determination (that is, if the variable pattern OP4 is selected) case), a win notification to notify a jackpot is performed as a win/loss notification (t7 in FIG. 22). Note that the operation promotion performance may not be performed in the final performance. When an operation promotion performance is performed in the deciding performance, the reliability of a jackpot may be higher than when no operation promotion performance is performed. If the operation promotion performance is not performed, a win or loss notification is performed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the decisive performance, regardless of whether or not the performance button 26 is operated.

In the hit notification, a jackpot is notified by a pattern alignment effect in which three decorative patterns 55 are aligned (t7 to t8 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24(K)). In the pattern alignment effect, decorative patterns 55 of the same type on the left and right sides are temporarily stopped in the middle area of the screen. The three decorative patterns 55 when the pattern alignment effect is performed are in a characterless mode. As shown in FIG. 24(K), when the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops in the middle area, a larger decorative pattern 55 than the left and right decorative patterns 55 is displayed, and an effect is applied to emphasize the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area. Image 60 is displayed. For example, the effect image 60 is an image that is displayed around the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area, is an image in which the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area emits light, and is an image that is brighter than the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area. be. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 24(K), even when three decorative patterns 55 of the same type are aligned, the three small patterns 56 are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, the small symbol 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode ("333") at the timing when the hit notification shown in FIG. 24(K) is performed. In this case, the three small patterns 56 swing in the same manner as the decorative pattern 55 in a jackpot mode after the timing of the hit notification shown in FIG. 24(K), and when the decorative pattern 55 stops, The main stop may be made (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed).

Incidentally, at time t7 in FIG. 22, instead of the pattern alignment effect, a jackpot may be announced by an accessory operation effect in which the movable accessory 7 is activated. In the accessory action performance, for example, the movable accessory 7 appears in front of the liquid crystal screen 5, and the screen is almost entirely covered by the movable accessory 7. As a result, the player is notified of the jackpot. When a jackpot is announced by a role-playing effect instead of a symbol alignment effect, the left and right decorative symbols 55 may be hidden during the SPSP reach effect (FIGS. 23(H) to 24(J)). . In this case, although the small pattern 56 is displayed, the left and right decorative patterns 55 are not displayed, and even if the video effect for the SPSP reach effect (for example, the effect in which an ally character attacks an enemy character) is displayed. good. Further, when the left and right decorative symbols 55 are hidden during the SPSP ready-to-win performance, the small symbols 56 may also be hidden. Then, in the deciding performance at the end of the SPSP reach performance (FIG. 24 (J)), for example, a performance that incites whether or not the attack of an ally character will be successful is performed, and at time t7 in FIG. 22, a role-playing performance is performed. be exposed.

Moreover, the symbol matching performance may be performed immediately after the accessory object action representation is performed, or the accessory object action representation may be performed immediately after the symbol matching representation is performed.

After the symbol alignment performance (or/and role object activation performance), a first light emission performance, which is a type of winning light emission performance, is performed (t8 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24(L)). The first light emitting performance is a performance performed on the decorative pattern 55 when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a jackpot mode, and is a performance that emphasizes the decorative pattern 55. Here, "when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a jackpot mode" refers to a case where the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a jackpot mode and a case where the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a jackpot mode. and a case where the decorative pattern 55 is about to be displayed in a jackpot mode. That is, the first light emitting effect may be started with the decorative pattern 55 in the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 24(L) being displayed, or the decorative pattern 55 in the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 24(L) may be displayed. The first light emitting effect may be started at the timing of the display. Further, the first light emitting effect may be started immediately before the decorative pattern 55 in the jackpot mode shown in FIG. 24(L) is displayed. For example, in the first light emitting effect, an effect image 61 (for example, a white image) that is brighter than the decorative pattern 55 itself is placed around each decorative pattern 55 so that the surroundings of the three decorative patterns 55 emit light in a common color. It may be an effect to be displayed. The effect image 61 is added to each of the three decorative patterns 55. The effect image 61 in this first light emission effect may be a different image from the effect image 60 in the pattern matching effect, or may be the same image. Further, the first light emitting effect may be a effect in which the decorative pattern 55 itself emits light. Note that the first light emitting effect may display a rainbow-colored effect image 61 that suggests a jackpot.

Further, in the first light emitting effect, the three decorative patterns 55 are "large" in size and are displayed in a characterless manner. Specifically, it is larger than the left and right decorative symbols 55 during the SPSP reach performance, the three decorative symbols 55 during the pre-reach performance, and the decorative symbol 55 in the middle area when the symbols are aligned as shown in FIG. 24(K). The three decorative patterns 55 are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area is displayed larger than the left and right decorative patterns 55. In the first light emitting effect, three decorative patterns 55 are displayed as being enlarged as they move from the back of the screen to the front. After the three decorative patterns 55 are enlarged to the maximum, the three decorative patterns 55 are reduced so as to move from the front to the back of the screen. Further, in conjunction with the first light emission effect, a first winning light emission effect sound is output from the speaker 24. In this embodiment, the display time of the effect image 60 related to the first light emission effect and the output time of the first winning light emission effect sound are the same. Note that any relationship between these times may be used; for example, the output time may be shorter or longer than the display time. Furthermore, during the first light emission performance, the three small patterns 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. In addition, during execution of the first light emission effect, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode at the timing when the first light emitting effect is started. Further, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode before the first light emitting effect is started (for example, at time t7), and the temporarily stopped state may be continued during the first light emitting effect. Moreover, the small pattern 56 may be hidden during the first light emission effect.

The first light emission effect is performed by reproducing a moving image stored in advance. Specifically, a moving image of a decorative pattern for the first light emitting effect (a moving image in which the decorative pattern 55 emits light) is stored in advance in the image and sound control unit 140, and by playing the moving image, the first A light-emitting display will be held. Note that the decorative pattern 55 and the effect image 61 are stored in advance in the image and sound control unit 140 of the gaming machine 1, and the image and sound control unit 140 displays the effect image 61 around the decorative pattern 55, thereby causing the first light emission. A performance may also be performed.

Then, when the first light emitting effect is finished (when the effect image 61 is hidden), the three decorative patterns 55 temporarily stop in a state of "medium" size, as shown in FIG. 24(M). 22 t9). In this state, the three decorative patterns 55 do not stop completely and swing on the screen. At this time, the three decorative patterns 55 may be in a form without a character or may be in a form with a character. For example, the three decorative patterns 55 in the characterless mode shown in FIG. 24(L) may be reduced, and the three decorative patterns 55 in the characterless mode in FIG. 24(M) may swing. Alternatively, after the three decorative patterns 55 without characters are displayed in FIG. 24(L), the background is switched to a jackpot background image (or a normal background image), and in FIG. 24(M), the characters are displayed. The three decorative patterns 55 of the aspect may swing. When switching to a normal background image in FIG. 24(M), the pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 may be displayed again.

When the predetermined swing period has elapsed, a second light emitting effect, which is a type of winning light emitting effect, is performed (t10 in FIG. 22, (N) in FIG. 24). The second light emitting performance is a performance performed on the decorative pattern 55 while the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode, and is a performance that emphasizes the decorative pattern 55. The second light emitting effect is a effect in which each of the three decorative patterns 55 emits light in a common color, and is different from the first light emitting effect. For example, in the second light emitting effect, an effect image 62 (for example, a white image) that is brighter than the decorative pattern 55 itself may be added to each of the three decorative patterns 55. Further, the second light emitting effect may be a moving image effect in which a part of the decorative pattern 55 emits light and the light emitting part moves from top to bottom. The decorative pattern 55 and the effect image 62 are stored in advance in the image and sound control unit 140 of the gaming machine 1, and the image and sound control unit 140 draws the effect image 62 on a layer in front of or behind the decorative pattern 55. , a second light emission effect may be performed. Alternatively, a moving image of a decorative pattern for the second light emitting effect (a moving image in which the decorative pattern 55 emits light) is stored in advance in the image and sound control unit 140, and by playing the moving image, the three decorative patterns 55 A second light emitting effect may be performed in which each of the lights emits light. Note that a rainbow-colored effect image 62 suggesting a jackpot may be displayed by the second light emitting effect.

In addition, in the second light emitting effect, the three decorative patterns 55 may have a "medium" size and be displayed in a manner with a character, or may be "medium" in size and be displayed in a manner without a character. You can. Even during the second light emission performance, the three decorative patterns 55 continue to oscillate. Further, along with the second light emission effect, a second winning light emission effect sound different from the first winning light emission effect sound is output from the speaker 24. Note that the second winning light emitting effect sound may be the same effect sound as the first winning light emitting effect sound. In this embodiment, the display time of the effect image 62 related to the second light emission effect and the output time of the second winning light emission effect sound are the same. Note that any relationship between these times may be used; for example, the output time may be shorter or longer than the display time. Further, during the execution of the second light emitting effect, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. Incidentally, during execution of the second light emitting effect, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode like the decorative symbols 55. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode at the timing when the second light emitting effect is started. Further, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode before the second light emitting effect is started (for example, at time t7), and the temporarily stopped state may be continued during the second light emitting effect. Moreover, the small pattern 56 may be hidden during the second light emission effect.

When the second light emitting effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 24(O), the three decorative patterns 55 swing in the "medium" size mode (t11 in FIG. 22). At this time, the appearance of the three decorative patterns 55 is the same as that at the time of the second light emission effect. Then, when a predetermined swing period has elapsed, the special symbols are stopped by the game control section 100, and a fluctuation stop command is sent to the performance control section 130, and the three decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped, and the three small symbols 56 is also fully stopped (t12 in FIG. 22, FIG. 24(P)). Here, the final stop means that the three decorative patterns 55 come to a complete stop. In addition, in response to this fluctuation stop command, the fourth symbol 57 also stops fluctuating, and is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

When a predetermined fixed stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, an opening command indicating the start of the jackpot game is transmitted from the game control section 100 to the production control section 130, and the corresponding In response to receiving the opening command, the presentation control unit 130 starts the opening presentation (t13 in FIG. 22, (Q) in FIG. 24). Then, when the opening period has elapsed, a jackpot game in which the jackpot 13 is opened is started. In response to the start of the jackpot game, a round start command for the first round is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the production control unit 130, and in response to the round start command, the production control unit 130 starts the jackpot production. .

In this way, during the winning notification, the winning light emitting effects (the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect) are performed for the decorative pattern 55.

In addition, when the winning notification is performed, in addition to the image effect performed on the LCD screen 5, a light emitting effect (lamp light emitting effect) is performed in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 is made to emit light in a manner suggesting a jackpot. be exposed. The lamp lighting effect using the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 is performed for a predetermined period from the winning notification at time t7. For example, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 are equipped with a plurality of LEDs that can emit light in a plurality of colors, and in the lamp lighting effect, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 have a predetermined light emission pattern ( For example, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a rainbow-colored light emitting pattern). The details of the lamp lighting effect during the winning notification will be described later.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol determination is a loss, after FIG. 24(J), the three decorative symbols 55 are not aligned and the loss is reported. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing details of the loss notification performed as a result of the SPSP reach effect. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the screen when a loss notification is performed, which is an effect subsequent to FIG. 23.

As shown in FIG. 25, at time t7, a loss notification is performed by a pattern irregularity effect in which the three decorative patterns 55 are not aligned. In the pattern irregularity effect, a decorative pattern 55 different from the left and right decorative patterns 55 temporarily stops in the middle area, resulting in a missed hit (FIG. 26 (K-2)). At this time, the effect image 60 attached to the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area shown in FIG. 24(K) is not displayed. In addition, when a reach-losing eye is displayed, an effect image different from or the same as the effect image 60 may be displayed on the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area. Further, even when the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops in the middle area, the three small patterns 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. Incidentally, the small symbol 56 may be temporarily stopped in a loss mode ("343") at the timing when the loss notification shown in FIG. 26 (K-2) is performed. After the uneven pattern effect is performed, the background changes to a normal background image, and the three decorative patterns 55 (reach loss eyes) indicating reach loss temporarily stop at the center of the screen and swing (t8-2 in FIG. 25, Figure 26 (L-2)). At the timing when the screen switches to the normal background, the three decorative patterns 55 are "medium" in size and return to the character mode. At this time, the pending icon 51 and the changing icon 53 are also displayed again. Also, at time 8-2, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed.

Then, when a predetermined swing period has elapsed, a fluctuation stop command is transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the performance control unit 130, and in response to receiving the fluctuation stop command, the three decorative symbols 55 are stopped. , the three small symbols 56 also come to a permanent stop (t8-3 in FIG. 25, FIG. 26 (M-2)). Furthermore, when the right to special symbol determination is reserved, a special symbol determination related to the right is performed, and a fluctuation start command is transmitted from the game control section 100 to the performance control section 130. In response to this variation start command, the three decorative patterns 55 that have been permanently stopped start varying (FIG. 26 (N-2)).

The above-mentioned swing period in the loss notification (period from time t8-2 to t8-3) may be shorter or longer than the swing period after the first light emission effect in the win notification (period from time t9 to t10). You can.

Note that during the swing period in the loss notification, a revival promotion performance may be performed to make the player expect a revival performance. The revival performance is a performance in which a jackpot is announced after the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped (temporarily lost) in a loss mode after the decisive performance. If it is determined to be a jackpot in the special symbol judgment, after a revival promotion performance, a revival performance may be performed and a jackpot may be announced. For example, a role-playing effect may be performed as a revival effect. Further, if it is determined that the special symbol is a loss in the special symbol determination, the revival performance is not performed after the revival promotion performance, and the variable performance ends. When a revival promotion effect or a revival effect is performed, the above-mentioned swing period (period from time t8-2 to t8-3) is the same as the swing period after the first light emission effect in the winning notification (from time t9 to t10). period) may be longer.

(Re-drawing performance during winning notification)
During the winning notification shown in FIGS. 22 and 24(K) onwards, a re-lottery effect may be performed. The re-lottery performance is a performance that shows that the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, and is a performance that makes the player expect whether or not the types of the three decorative symbols 55 will be changed. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the type of jackpot is suggested by the type of decorative pattern 55 when three decorative patterns 55 are aligned. For example, the "7" symbol is a symbol that indicates a 10R probability variable jackpot, which is the most advantageous jackpot for the player, the odd number symbol is a symbol indicating a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot), and the even number symbol is a symbol indicating a probability variation jackpot (10R probability variation jackpot or 4R probability variation jackpot). , 4R This is a symbol that usually suggests the possibility of a jackpot. Therefore, the re-lottery performance is a performance that makes the player expect whether or not it will be an advantageous jackpot.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of the performance when the re-lottery performance is performed during the winning notification. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a re-lottery effect is performed during winning notification.

As shown in FIG. 27, after the deciding performance at the final stage of the SPSP reach performance, a jackpot is announced by the symbol alignment performance and/or the role-playing performance, and then the first light emission performance is performed at time T8-1. (Fig. 28(A)). After the first light emitting effect is performed, the three decorative symbols 55 swing together in the center of the screen (FIG. 28(B)), and at time T8-2, a re-lottery effect is performed (FIG. 28(C) )).

In the re-lottery performance, for example, a plurality of symbol rows in which three decorative symbols 55 of the same kind are aligned horizontally (for example, a "333" symbol row or a "444" symbol row) are displayed, and the plurality of symbol rows are displayed on the screen. The movement from the top to the bottom is displayed. Even during this re-lottery performance, the three small symbols 56 are changing at high speed. Then, after the re-lottery effect is performed for a predetermined time, at time T8-3, as a result of the re-lottery effect, the three decorative symbols 55 are aligned and temporarily stopped, and the first light emitting effect is performed (FIG. 28( D)). The second first light emission effect performed at time T8-3 (FIG. 28(D)) and the first first light emission effect carried out at time T8-1 (FIG. 28(A)) are the same effect. It may be different, or it may be a different production. Also, during the second first light emission performance, the three small symbols 56 are changing at high speed. In addition, during this second first light emission performance, the three small symbols 56 may temporarily stop in the same jackpot mode as the three decorative symbols 55. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped at the timing when the second first light emitting effect is started or after it is started. Further, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped before the second first light emission performance is started, and the temporarily stopped state may be maintained during the second first light emission performance.

For example, if the type of the decorative pattern 55 displayed in the second first light emitting effect is different from the type of the decorative pattern 55 displayed in the first first light emitting effect, the second first light emitting effect and the first light emitting effect are different. The presentation mode may be different from the first light emission presentation of the second time. During the first flash performance, an even number symbol suggesting a 4R normal jackpot is displayed, and during the second flash performance, an odd number symbol (odd symbols other than the "7" symbol) suggesting a 4R probability jackpot or a 10R probability variation jackpot is displayed. When the "7" symbol suggesting ``7'' is displayed, the first light emitting effect for the first time and the first light emitting effect for the second time may be in different presentation modes. Specifically, in this case, the second first light emission effect may be more flashy than the first first light emission effect. In the second first flash effect, a flashier effect is performed when the "7" symbol suggesting a 10R probability-variable jackpot is displayed than when an odd-numbered symbol suggesting a 4R probability-variable jackpot is displayed. You can. In other words, when an upgrade is performed by a re-lottery performance (notifying the player that it is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player), the first light emission performance before the upgrade is performed at time T8-1, and the first light emission performance is performed at time T8-3. A different effect may be performed with the first light emission effect after the upgrade. For example, in the first light emitting performance before the upgrade, the white effect image 61 is displayed around the decorative pattern 55, while in the first light emitting performance after the upgrade, the rainbow effect image 61 is displayed around the decorative pattern 55. May be displayed. Further, the decorative pattern 55 may be displayed larger in the first light emitting effect after the upgrade than in the first light emitting effect before the upgrade.

On the other hand, if an even-numbered symbol indicating a 4R normal jackpot is displayed during the first light-emitting effect of the first time, and the same even-numbered symbol is displayed during the second light-emitting effect of the second time, then the first light-emitting effect of the first time and the second The first light emission effect may be the same effect mode. Alternatively, in this case, the second first light emission effect may be a more modest effect than the first first light emission effect. For example, in the first first light emission performance, a relatively large decorative pattern 55 is displayed and a relatively bright color effect image 61 is displayed, and in the second first light emission performance, a relatively small decorative pattern 55 is displayed. The effect image 61 may also be displayed in a relatively dark color.

After the second first light emission effect is performed, the three decorative patterns 55 swing together in the center of the screen (t9 in FIG. 27, FIG. 28(E)). Then, a second light emission effect is performed (FIG. 28(F)). From FIG. 28(F) onwards, the same effects as those from FIG. 24(N) onwards are performed.

In this way, the first light emitting effect may be performed twice during the winning notification. Even in this case, the second light emission effect is performed only once.

(Win notification by stopping special symbols)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, special symbols are prepared in addition to the decorative symbols 55 represented by numbers such as "1" to "9" symbols. Below, the hit notification by stopping the special symbol will be explained.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the flow of variable effects including special effects. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing details of the winning notification performed as a result of the special effect. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including the special effect shown in FIG. 29 is performed. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another example of an image displayed on the screen when a variable effect including a special effect is performed. As described above, the variable effect including the special effect is executed when the variable pattern OP3 or RP3 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 29, similarly to FIG. 21, after the start of the special symbol fluctuation, each performance is performed in the order of the pre-reach performance and the N reach performance (t0 to t2 in FIG. 29), and at time t3, the SP reach performance is started (FIG. 31(A)). FIG. 31(A) is an image similar to FIG. 23(G).

After the SP reach effect has started, instead of performing the SPSP development effect, a temporary loss is notified by temporarily stopping a decorative pattern 55 different from the left and right decorative patterns 55 in the center of the screen (T4 in FIG. 29). -1, Figure 31(B)). Thereafter, a special development inciting performance is performed that makes the player expect whether or not the game will develop into a special performance (T5-1 in FIG. 29). After the special development inciting performance, the special performance is started (T5-2 in FIG. 29, FIG. 31(C)). In the special performance, special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a performance is performed that makes the player expect the special symbols to stop (FIG. 31(D)). Alternatively, the special performance may be such that the player expects the special symbol to change from an unclear state to a clear state. Here, the special symbol is an image that does not include a numerical symbol, but is a symbol consisting of images of letters, characters, etc., and is, for example, a symbol that suggests the possibility of both a 4R probability-variable jackpot and a 4R normal jackpot. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the special performance, a win or loss notification is performed (T7-1 in FIG. 29). Note that even when a tentative loss is reported at T4-1, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. Further, even during execution of the special performance, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed.

If the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, a hit notification is performed as a win/loss notification (T7-1 in FIG. 30). Specifically, at time T7-1, the special symbol temporarily stops (FIG. 31(E)). Alternatively, the special symbol may change to a clear state as a hit notification. As a result, the player is notified of the jackpot. Even when this special symbol temporarily stops, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. In addition, when the special symbol stops, the three small symbols 56 may also be temporarily stopped. In this case, a small symbol (special small symbol) corresponding to the special symbol displayed in a large size in the center of the screen may be temporarily stopped in the lower left area of the screen.

When a special symbol is displayed, a first light emitting effect is performed (T7-2 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31(F)). For example, the first light emission effect is performed after the special symbol temporarily stops or at the timing when the special symbol temporarily stops. The first light emitting performance performed here is a performance performed on a special symbol, and is a performance that emphasizes the special symbol. For example, the first light emitting effect for a special pattern is a effect that displays an effect image 63 (for example, a white image) that is brighter than the special pattern itself around the special pattern so that the area around the special pattern emits light in a predetermined color. It may be. The effect image 63 is a different image from the effect image 61 added to each of the three decorative patterns 55 in FIG. 24(L). Further, during the first light emission performance for the special symbol, the special symbol is displayed in an enlarged manner. Note that the effect image 63 in the first light emitting effect for the special symbol and the effect image 61 in the first light emitting effect when the symbols are aligned (FIG. 24(L)) may be the same image. Even during the first light emission performance for the special symbol, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. Note that the three small patterns 56 may be temporarily stopped during this first light emission effect. For example, the three small patterns 56 may be temporarily stopped at the timing when the first light emitting effect is started or after the first light emitting effect is started. Further, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped before the first light emitting effect is started, and the temporarily stopped state may be maintained during the first light emitting effect.

When the first light emission effect ends, the special symbol temporarily stops at the center of the screen and swings (T7-3 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31(G)). When the predetermined swing period has elapsed, the second light emission effect is performed (T7-4 in FIG. 30, FIG. 31(H)). The second light emitting performance is a performance performed on a special symbol, and is a performance that emphasizes the special symbol. For example, the second light emission performance for the special symbol is a performance in which the effect image 64 is added to the special symbol so that a part of the special symbol emits light in a predetermined luminescent color. The effect image 64 may be the same image as the effect image 62 added to each of the three decorative patterns 55 in FIG. 24(N), or may be a different image. Even during the second light emission performance for the special symbol, the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. Note that the three small patterns 56 may be temporarily stopped during this second light emission effect. For example, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped at the timing when the second light emitting effect is started or after the second light emitting effect is started. Furthermore, the three small symbols 56 may be temporarily stopped before the second light emitting effect is started, and the temporarily stopped state may be maintained during the second light emitting effect.

When the second light emitting effect ends, the special symbol swings in the center of the screen (T7-5 in Figure 30, Figure 31 (I)), and then, in response to the stop of the special symbol, the special symbol stops, and the small The symbol 56 also stops (T7-6 in FIG. 30).

In addition, when a jackpot is announced by a special symbol, the second light emitting effect does not need to be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, after the first light emission is performed at time T7-2, the special symbol swings in the center of the screen (FIG. 32(G)), and then the second light emission is performed. The special symbol comes to a permanent stop in response to the stop of the special symbol without any performance being performed, and the small symbol 56 also comes to a permanent stop as a special small symbol corresponding to the special symbol (FIG. 32 (G-2)).

Further, although not shown in the drawings, when a jackpot is announced using a special symbol, the first light emitting effect may not be performed. In this case, the first light emitting effect may not be performed at time T7-2, and the second light emitting effect may be performed at time T-4. Moreover, when a jackpot is announced by a special symbol, both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect do not need to be performed.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol judgment is a loss, the special symbol will not stop (or the special symbol will not be clearly displayed) in FIG. 31(E), and the first light emission effect and the second light emission The decorative pattern indicating a loss is stopped without any effect being performed.

(Win notification in certain variable gaming state)
Next, the winning notification in the variable probability gaming state will be explained. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 37, the winning notification performed after the battle performance in the variable probability gaming state will be explained. In the variable probability game state, if a jackpot is determined in the special symbol determination, a reach is established in the variable performance, and a battle performance in which characters fight each other is performed. In the variable probability game state, when it is determined that there is a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variable jackpot, a victory performance is performed as a result of the battle performance. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a 4R normal jackpot in the variable probability gaming state, a battle performance is performed, and as a result of the battle performance, a defeat performance is performed. In addition, in the variable probability game state, even if it is determined that the special symbol is a loss and the reach variation pattern RP5 is selected, a reach is established in the variation performance and a battle performance is performed. In this case, a draw effect is performed as a result of the battle effect. Hereinafter, in the variable probability gaming state, a case where it is determined to be a 10R probability variable jackpot or a 4R probability variable jackpot will be explained.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the flow of variable performance when it is determined that there is a jackpot in the variable probability gaming state. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variable effect shown in FIG. 33 is performed. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the effect following FIG. 34. The variation effects shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 are executed when variation pattern OP5-1 or OP5-2 is selected.

FIG. 34(A) shows an example of an image at the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol ends in the variable probability game state. As shown in FIG. 34(A), in the variable probability game state, a decorative pattern different from that in the normal game state is displayed as the decorative pattern 55. In the variable probability game state, the decorative pattern 55 is ``medium'' in size and has no character. In addition, in the probability variable gaming state, a background image for probability variation is displayed as a background image. Furthermore, in the variable probability game state, characters and images are displayed on the screen that urge the player to "play right." Further, a fourth symbol 59 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed at the right end of the screen. Note that a fourth symbol 57 corresponding to the first special symbol is also displayed.

Further, in the lower area of the screen, a plurality of pending icons 51 indicating the pending of the right to determine the second special symbol, and a changing icon 53 indicating the current variation of the second special symbol are displayed. Further, at the lower right of the screen, a pending number 52 indicating the pending number of first special symbol determination and second special symbol determination is displayed. Further, a small pattern 56 is displayed at the lower left of the screen. Since the small symbols 56 are displayed in the same way as in the normal gaming state, detailed explanation will be omitted below. Note that the small symbols 56 are displayed in the normal gaming state, and may not be displayed in the variable probability gaming state.

When the second special symbol determination is performed in the game control section 100, the second special symbol display starts to fluctuate on the second special symbol display 42, and a fluctuation start command is sent from the game control section 100 to the performance control section 130. be done. In response to receiving this variation start command, the production control unit 130 starts varying the three decorative patterns 55 on the liquid crystal screen 5 (t0 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34(B)). Further, on the liquid crystal screen 5, the plurality of hold icons 51 each move to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 51 is displayed as a changing icon 53. Further, in response to reception of the fluctuation start command, the number of reservations indicated by the reservation number 52 decreases. In addition, in the subsequent figures, the display of the pending number 52 is omitted for the sake of simplification of the figures.

A pre-reach performance is performed for a predetermined period (t0 to t1) from the start of variation of the decorative pattern 55. In the pre-reach performance, the three decorative patterns 55 change at high speed in the same manner as at the start of the fluctuation (size "medium" and no character) (Fig. 34 (B)), and after a predetermined time elapses, the three decorative symbols 55 move to the left area. The decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops in the right area (FIG. 34(C)), and a reach-increasing effect is performed to determine whether the decorative pattern 55 of the same type as the left area will temporarily stop in the right area (FIG. 34(D)). When the decorative pattern 55 of the same type as the left area temporarily stops in the right area as a result of the reach promotion effect, a reach is established (t1 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34(E)). The details of the performance after the reach is established will be described later, but only the outline will be described below.

When the reach is established, for example, a battle start effect indicating that a battle effect between character A and character B is to be started is performed (FIG. 34 (F)), and the battle effect is started (at t2 in FIG. 33, 34(G)). The opponent's character (Character B in the figure) in this battle performance suggests the degree of reliability for a guaranteed jackpot. During the battle performance, a video performance of character A and character B fighting is performed on the screen. During the battle performance, the decorative patterns 55 are displayed in a "small" size and without characters on the left and right sides of the screen, for example. Note that the decorative pattern 55 does not need to be displayed during the battle performance.

When the battle performance is performed for a predetermined period of time, a decisive performance is performed at the final stage of the battle performance (t3 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34(H)). This decisive performance is a performance that incites whether or not character A will win against character B, and is different from the decisive performance in the normal game state (see FIG. 24 (J) above). In the deciding performance, as shown in FIG. 34(H), for example, an operation promotion performance (for example, display of the operation promotion image 65 and the valid period image 651) that prompts the player to operate the performance button 26 may be performed. . This operation promotion performance may be the same as the operation promotion performance in the normal gaming state (FIG. 24(J)), or may be a different performance.

In response to the operation of the performance button 26 in the deciding performance, or in response to the elapse of a predetermined time, a win or loss notification is performed. In the case of a jackpot, a win notification is performed as a win/loss notification (t4 in FIG. 33, FIG. 34(I)).

Specifically, as an example of winning notification, a victory performance is performed at time t4. The victory performance is a performance that notifies that character A has won in the battle performance. In addition, in the winning performance, a pattern alignment performance in which three decorative patterns 55 are aligned is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 55 of the same type as the left and right decorative patterns 55 are temporarily stopped in the middle area, and the effect image 60 is displayed around the decorative patterns 55 in the middle area. This effect image 60 may be a different image from the effect image 60 at the time of winning notification in the normal gaming state (FIG. 24(K)), or may be the same image.

In addition, at time t4, as a winning performance, instead of the pattern alignment performance, an accessory operation performance in which the movable accessory 7 is activated may be performed.

Further, the accessory movement effect may be performed immediately after the symbol alignment effect is performed. That is, immediately after the jackpot is announced using the decorative pattern 55, the movable accessory 7 may be used to announce the jackpot.

Following the symbol alignment effect or the accessory movement effect, the first light emission effect is performed (t5 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35(J)). The first light emitting performance is a performance performed on the decorative pattern 55, and is a performance that emphasizes the decorative pattern 55. For example, the first light emitting effect may be a effect that displays the effect image 61 around each decorative pattern 55 so that the surroundings of the three decorative patterns 55 emit light in a common color. The three decorative patterns 55 during the first light emission performance are "large" in size and are displayed in a characterless manner, and the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area is displayed larger than the left and right decorative patterns 55.

Note that this first light emitting effect may be the same effect as the first light emitting effect (FIG. 24(L)) in the normal gaming state, or may be a different effect. The execution time of the first light emission effect (FIG. 35 (J)) in the variable probability game state may be shorter or longer than the execution time of the first light emission effect (FIG. 24 (L)) in the normal game state. However, it may be the same.

After the first light emission effect, the three decorative patterns 55 oscillate for a predetermined period of time (FIG. 35(K)). While the three decorative patterns 55 are swinging, the three decorative patterns 55 are "medium" in size and in a non-character mode. Thereafter, a re-lottery performance is performed (t6 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35(L)). In the re-lottery performance, a performance is performed in which three decorative symbols 55 of the same type are aligned and fluctuate, and a performance is performed that makes the player expect which kind of decorative symbols 55 will be aligned and stopped.

After the re-lottery performance is performed, three decorative patterns 55 of any one of a plurality of types stop together. At this time, the second first light emission effect is performed (t7 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35(M)). Similarly to the case where the re-lottery effect is performed in the normal gaming state, the second first light emitting effect (FIG. 35(M)) performed at time t7 is different from the first first light emitting effect (FIG. 35(M)) performed at time t5. The effect may be different from that shown in FIG. 35(J) or may be the same effect. In the second first light emission performance, as in the first first light emission performance, the three decorative patterns 55 are "large" in size and are displayed without characters, and the decorative patterns in the middle area are 55 is displayed largest.

After the second first light emitting effect is performed, the three decorative patterns 55 swing (t8 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35 (N)), and then, when the second special pattern stops, the three decorative patterns 55 swing. The symbol 55 comes to a final stop (t9 in FIG. 33, FIG. 35(O)). During this period from time t8 to time t9, the three decorative patterns 55 have a "medium" size and are displayed in a characterless manner. The time from when the first light emitting effect is performed in the variable game state until the decorative pattern 55 comes to a final stop (the period of swinging of the three decorative patterns 55) is the period from when the first light emitting effect is performed in the normal game state until the decorative pattern 55 stops. It is shorter than the time it takes for the symbol 55 to come to a final stop. Then, an opening effect indicating that a jackpot game is to be started is performed (FIG. 35(P)).

In addition, in FIGS. 33 and 35, a case has been described in which a re-lottery effect is performed and the first light emitting effect is performed twice in winning notification in a variable probability gaming state, but the re-lottery effect is not performed and the first light emitting effect is performed twice. may be performed only once. Moreover, the second light emission effect may be performed after the first light emission effect even in the variable probability game state.

FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of a variable effect when a second light emission effect is performed after the first light emission effect when a winning notification is performed in a probability variable gaming state. As shown in FIG. 36, after the first light emitting effect is performed between time t5 and t6, the second light emitting effect is performed at time t7. Then, after the second light emitting performance, the three decorative patterns 55 swing, and in response to the stop of the special pattern, the three decorative patterns 55 come to a final stop. The time from when the second light emitting effect is performed in the variable game state to when the decorative symbols 55 come to a final stop (the period of swinging of the three decorative symbols 55) is the period from when the second light emitting representation is performed in the normal game state to when the decorative symbols 55 come to a complete stop. It is shorter than the time it takes for the symbol 55 to come to a final stop.

Here, the second light emitting effect in the variable probability game state is the same effect as the second light emitting effect described in the normal game state, and is brighter than the decorative pattern 55 itself so that a part of each decorative pattern 55 emits light. This is an effect in which an effect image 62 (FIG. 24(N)) is displayed. Note that the effect image displayed in the second light emitting effect in the variable probability gaming state may be a different image from the effect image 62 displayed in the second light emitting effect in the variable probability gaming state.

Furthermore, even when the second light emitting effect is performed in the variable probability game state, the re-lottery effect may be performed after the first first light emitting effect, and the second first light emitting effect may be performed after the re-lottery effect. . Specifically, in this case, after the victory performance, the first light emission performance is performed for the first time, and then the re-lottery performance is performed. After the re-lottery performance, the first light emission performance is performed for the second time, and thereafter, the second light emission performance is further performed, and the three decorative symbols 55 come to a final stop.

Further, if it is determined that there is a variable probability jackpot in the variable probability gaming state, the first light emission effect may not be performed and only the second light emission effect may be performed.

Next, a description will be given of a variable performance when a 4R normal jackpot is determined in the special symbol determination in the probability variable gaming state. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the screen when a 4R normal jackpot is determined in the variable probability gaming state. Regarding the performance before the final performance in FIG. 37(H), the same performance as in FIGS. 34(B) to (G) is performed.

When it is determined that the 4R normal jackpot is determined by the special symbol determination in the probability variable gaming state, the variable pattern OP6 is selected as the special symbol variable pattern, and the variable performance is started. In this case, similarly to FIG. 33, the pre-reach performance, battle start performance, and battle performance are performed in order, and the deciding performance (FIG. 37(H)) is performed at the final stage of the battle performance.

Then, after the deciding performance at the final stage of the battle performance, at time t4, a defeat performance is performed as a win notification (4R normal jackpot notification) (FIG. 37 (I-2)). In the defeat effect, a video showing that character A has been defeated is displayed. In addition, in the defeat performance, decorative patterns different from the left and right stops in the middle area, resulting in a reach loss. A reach loss in this probability variable gaming state indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is not a loss but a 4R normal jackpot. When decorative patterns different from the left and right sides stop in the middle area, no effect image is displayed around the decorative pattern in the middle area. Note that when decorative patterns different from the left and right sides are stopped in the middle area, an effect image may be displayed around the decorative pattern in the middle area. The effect image displayed at this time may be a different image from the effect image 60 (FIG. 34(I)) displayed during the victory performance, or may be the same image. Further, when a defeat effect is performed, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are not performed. After the defeat effect, the screen switches to the time when the special symbols start to change in the variable probability game state, and the three decorative symbols swing while the left and right different kinds of decorative symbols are stopped in the middle area (Fig. 37 (J- 2)). Then, in response to the stop of the special symbols, the three decorative symbols 55 come to a permanent stop, and the three small symbols 56 also come to a permanent stop (FIG. 37(O)). Next, an opening performance is performed (FIG. 37(P)), and a jackpot game related to the 4R normal jackpot is started. During the jackpot game related to the opening performance and the 4R normal jackpot, a display is made to prompt the player to hit the ball to the right. Further, as shown in the figure, results are displayed showing the total number of prize balls won by the player, the number of jackpots, etc. after the transition to the variable probability gaming state. In addition, in the case of a 4R normal jackpot in a variable probability gaming state, in the jackpot game related to the 4R normal jackpot, the opening time of the jackpot 13 per 1R is short (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the player hardly wins the prize. The player may be prevented from acquiring the ball. Furthermore, in the case of a 4R normal jackpot in the variable probability gaming state, the opening time of the big prize opening 13 per 1R is 29.5 seconds at the maximum, and the player may be able to win 4R worth of prize balls. . In this case, instead of the result display shown in FIG. 37(P), a jackpot effect indicating a 4R normal jackpot may be performed.

(Lamp lighting effect during hit notification)
Here, the lamp lighting effect during the winning notification will be explained in detail. As described above, during the winning notification, a lamp lighting effect is performed in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a lighting pattern (for example, a rainbow-colored lighting pattern) that suggests a jackpot. The lamp lighting effect related to the winning notification is performed at the timing when the winning notification starts (t7 in FIG. 22, T7-1 in FIG. 30, t4 in FIG. 33). Specifically, at the timing when the winning notification starts (for example, the timing when the effect button 26 is operated), a command is transmitted from the effect control unit 130 to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp control unit 150 responds to the command. Based on this, execution of the lamp lighting effect is started.

More specifically, the lamp lighting performance related to the winning notification is divided into performances corresponding to the pattern alignment performance (or role object activation performance), the first lighting performance, and the second lighting performance. For example, when the effect button 26 is operated while the screen shown in FIG. 24(J) is displayed, the lamp control unit 150 responds to the command from the effect control unit 130 as shown in FIG. 24(K). A lamp light-emitting performance corresponding to a pattern matching performance (or a role-acting performance in which a movable role-playing object 7 appears in front of the screen) is executed. Next, at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed, the lamp control unit 150 executes a lamp light emission effect corresponding to the first light emission effect (FIG. 24(L)). Further, at a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed, the lamp control unit 150 executes a lamp light emission effect corresponding to the second light emission effect (FIG. 24(N)). The lamp light emission effect in each of these periods may be different. For example, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a first light emitting pattern (for example, red) during the pattern alignment effect (or role object operation effect) shown in FIG. 24(K), and the first light emission effect The inside may emit light in a second light emitting pattern (for example, white), and during the second light emitting effect, it may emit light in a third light emitting pattern (for example, rainbow colors). In addition, from the start of the pattern alignment effect (or accessory activation effect) shown in FIG. 24(K) until the final stop of the decorative pattern 55, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 have the same light emission pattern ( For example, it may emit light in a rainbow color. For example, even if the lamp lighting effects during the pattern alignment effect, the first light emission effect, and the second light emission effect are the same (for example, a light emission pattern in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in rainbow colors) good.

That is, the lamp light emission effect is performed in conjunction with the winning light emission effect (the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect). Here, "two performances are linked" means that when one performance is performed, the other performance corresponding to the one performance is performed. The "interlocking" mode may be, for example, a mode using the same color, or a mode using different colors, but if a player who knows the pachinko game machine 1 sees one performance, he or she will know that the other performance is being performed. It may be “closely related aspects” to the extent that they are recognizable. Specifically, an example of "a mode in which the same color is used" is that, along with the first light emitting effect, a board lamp is displayed in the same white color as the effect image 61 related to the first light emitting effect by a lamp light emitting effect corresponding to the first light emitting effect. 25 and/or frame lamp 37 emit light. Further, an example of a "closely related aspect" is, for example, when the board lamp 25 and / Alternatively, the frame lamp 37 may be made to emit light. In this embodiment, if one effect (for example, lamp light emission) can be recognized from the other effect (for example, winning light emission effect), it is included in the interlock. For this reason, two interlocking performances may be in a relationship where each is a dedicated performance (i.e., a one-to-one relationship), or a relationship in which one is a performance exclusive to the other, but the reverse is not true (i.e., a one-to-many relationship). But that's fine.

The start timing and end timing of the two linked effects do not necessarily have to match. Note that the effects controlled by the image and sound control unit 140 and the effects controlled by the lamp control unit 150 are synchronized only at a predetermined timing, and after the predetermined timing, the effects are synchronized with the passage of time managed by the respective control units. It may be controlled accordingly. For example, a lamp lighting effect controlled by the lamp control unit 150 is started in response to a command transmitted at the timing when the winning notification is started (for example, the timing when the effect button 26 is operated). After the lamp light emission effect is started in response to the command, the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamp light emission effect according to the passage of time. Further, at the same timing, the image and sound control unit 140 performs the pattern matching effect shown in FIG. 24(K), and thereafter, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed in accordance with the passage of time. These two performances are synchronized only at a predetermined timing, and after the predetermined timing, they are controlled according to the passage of time managed by each control section. Note that the two effects may be executed while being synchronized during execution of the effects. When executing two performances in synchronization, for example, at the timing when the image shown in FIG. A control command is transmitted, and in response to the command, the lamp control unit 150 executes a lamp light emission effect corresponding to the first light emission effect. Further, at the timing when the image shown in FIG. 24(N) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, a control command is transmitted from the image sound control section 140 to the lamp control section 150 via the production control section 130, and the control command is , the lamp control unit 150 executes a lamp light emission effect corresponding to the second light emission effect.

It should be noted that the lamp lighting performance related to the winning notification ends in response to the start of the jackpot game. Specifically, the lamp lighting performance ends in response to a fluctuation stop command or an opening command being transmitted from the game control unit 100 to the performance control unit 130.

Note that in this embodiment, the two effects may be "non-linked". For example, a specific example will be described in which the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 continue to emit light in a light emission pattern linked to BGM that is continuously output from before the start of the N reach effect in conjunction with the N reach effect. In such a case, it can be recognized from the appearance of the liquid crystal screen 5 that the N reach effect is in progress. On the other hand, it cannot be recognized from the light emitting manner of the board lamp 25 etc. that the N reach performance is being performed. In this way, even if a player who knows the pachinko game machine 1 sees one effect (e.g., the light emission of the board lamp 25, etc.), it is difficult for the player to recognize that the other effect (for example, the N reach effect) is being performed. In some cases, these two performances are "unlinked."

Note that the reliability may be indicated by a lamp lighting effect related to the winning notification. For example, the first to third light emitting patterns of the lamp light emitting effect related to the hit notification described above may all be light emitting patterns using rainbow colors.

(Characteristics of the hit lighting effect)
The winning light emitting effects (the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect) in the normal game state and the winning light emitting effects (the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect) in the variable probability game state have been described above. Below, the characteristics of these light emitting effects will be explained.

The display mode of the decorative pattern 55 is different between the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect during the winning notification. For example, in both the normal game state and the variable probability game state, the three decorative symbols 55 during the first light emitting performance are larger (or may be smaller) than the three decorative symbols during the second light emitting performance. Further, in the normal game state, the three decorative symbols 55 during the first light emitting performance may be in a character-less mode, while the three decorative symbols 55 during the second light emitting display may be in a character-present mode. In addition, in both the normal game state and the variable probability game state, the visibility of the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area during the first light emitting performance is higher than the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols 55, while the visibility of the three decorative symbols 55 during the second light emitting performance is higher than that of the left and right decorative symbols 55. The visibility of the decorative pattern 55 is the same. Specifically, during the first light emission performance, the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area is larger than the left and right decorative patterns 55, and the entire (or most) of the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area is displayed on the screen. Since some of the left and right decorative patterns 55 are not displayed on the screen during the first light emission performance, it can be said that the decorative patterns 55 in the middle area have higher visibility than the left and right decorative patterns 55. On the other hand, during the second light emission performance, the sizes of the three decorative patterns 55 are the same, and it can be said that the visibility of the three decorative patterns 55 is the same.

Further, in both the normal game state and the variable probability game state, the area where the effect image 61 in the first light emission effect is displayed is larger than the area where the effect image 62 in the second light emission effect is displayed. Specifically, in the second light emitting effect, the effect image 62 is displayed in a partial area of each decorative pattern 55, whereas in the first light emitting effect, the effect image 62 is displayed in a relatively wide area around each decorative pattern 55. An effect image 61 is displayed.

In addition, in the normal game state, the decorative pattern 55 during the first light emitting effect is in a characterless mode in which no character is added to the numerical pattern, and the decorative pattern 55 during the second light emitting effect is a characterless mode in which a character is added to the numerical pattern. It has a characterful aspect. Note that the decorative pattern 55 during the second light emitting performance in the normal game state may be in a characterless mode in which no character is added to the numerical pattern. In addition, in the variable probability game state or the time-saving game state, the decorative pattern 55 during the first light emission effect is in a characterless mode in which no character is added to the numerical pattern, and the decorative pattern 55 during the second light emission effect also has a character added to the numerical pattern. This is a characterless mode in which no characters are added.

Further, in the normal game state, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are performed during the winning notification. In the variable probability game state, while the first light emitting effect is performed during the winning notification, the second light emitting effect may not be performed. Further, in the variable probability game state, the first light emitting effect may not be performed and the second light emitting effect may be performed during the winning notification. Note that even in the variable probability game state, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed. For example, in the variable probability game state, after the first light emitting effect is performed, the second light emitting effect may be performed and may not be performed.

Further, the execution time of the first light emission effect and the execution time of the second light emission effect are different. "Execution times are different" means that at least one of the length of time it takes to execute each effect and the execution timing is different. Specifically, the execution time of the second light emission effect is longer than the execution time of the first light emission effect. Note that the execution time of the second light emission effect may be shorter than the execution time of the first light emission effect.

Further, the execution time of the first light emitting effect and/or the second light emitting effect may vary depending on the game state. For example, the execution time of the second light emitting effect may vary depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal game state and the time-saving game state, the execution time of the second light emission effect is the same, while in the variable probability game state, the execution time of the second light emission effect may be shorter than in the normal game state. On the other hand, the execution time of the first light emitting effect may be the same in all game states. Note that while the execution time of the first light emission effect varies depending on the game state, the execution time of the second light emission effect may be the same in all game states.

Further, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emitting effect to the start of the second light emitting effect may be the same regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Further, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emitting effect to the start of the second light emitting effect may vary depending on the gaming state. For example, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emitting effect in the normal gaming state to the start of the second light emitting effect is the same as the time from the start (or end) of the first light emitting effect in the variable game state to the time the second light emitting effect starts (or ends). It may be longer (or shorter) than the time until the start of the performance.

Further, the presentation mode of the first light emission effect itself is different from the presentation mode of the second light emission effect itself. The presentation mode of the first light emission effect here may be the type, color, or size of the effect image 61, or the sound output during the first light emission effect. The production mode of the second light emission production is also similar. For example, the effect image 61 displayed around the decorative pattern 55 in the first light emitting effect and the effect image 62 added to the decorative pattern 55 in the second light emitting effect are different images.

Further, the lighting mode of the decorative pattern 55 is different between the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect. For example, in the first light emitting effect, the entire three decorative patterns 55 momentarily emit light (the surroundings of each decorative pattern 55 momentarily emit light). On the other hand, in the second light emitting effect, each decorative pattern 55 simultaneously emits light, for example, from top to bottom (the light emitting portion of the decorative pattern 55 moves from top to bottom). Further, the effect image 61 in the first light emission effect is displayed beyond the area of the decorative pattern 55, centering on the decorative pattern 55 in the middle area. On the other hand, the effect image 62 in the second light emission effect is displayed within the area of each decorative pattern 55.

Furthermore, the presentation mode of the first light emission effect and/or the presentation mode of the second light emission effect may be the same or different regardless of the game state. For example, the performance mode of the first light emission performance may be the same in the normal game state and the variable probability game state. Further, the performance mode of the second light emission performance may be the same in both the normal game state and the variable probability game state. Further, the performance mode of the second light emission performance is the same in both the normal game state and the variable probability game state, while the performance mode of the first light emission performance may be different between the normal game state and the variable probability game state. Conversely, the presentation mode of the first light emission effect is the same in both the normal game state and the variable probability game state, while the presentation mode of the second light emission effect may be different between the normal game state and the variable probability game state.

In addition, the number of executions of the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect performed in one special symbol variation (jackpot variation) may be the same in all gaming states, or may vary depending on the gaming state. Good too. For example, in the normal game state, the number of times the first light emitting effect is performed may be greater than the number of times the second light emitting effect is performed in one special symbol change (jackpot change). For example, in the normal game state, the first light emitting effect may be performed twice and the second light emitting effect may be performed once in one special symbol change (jackpot change). Further, in the variable probability game state, the number of times the first light emitting effect is performed and the number of times the second light emitting effect is performed in one special symbol change may be the same. For example, in the variable probability game state, the first light emission performance and the second light emission performance may each be performed once in one special symbol variation (jackpot variation). In addition, in the variable probability game state, in one special symbol variation (jackpot variation), the first light emission performance may be performed once or twice, and the second light emission performance may not be performed.

Further, the time from the start (or end) of the first light emitting effect until the three decorative symbols 55 come to a complete stop (the swinging period of the decorative symbols 55) may be the same in all game states. , may differ depending on the gaming state. Further, the swinging time from the end of the first light emitting effect to the start of the second light emitting effect may be the same in all game states, or may be different depending on the game state. Further, the time from the start (or end) of the second light emitting effect to the final stop of the three decorative symbols 55 may be the same in all game states, or may be different depending on the game state. good. In addition, while the time from the start (or end) of the first light emitting effect until the three decorative symbols 55 come to a final stop varies depending on the gaming state, the time from the start (or end) of the second light emitting effect varies depending on the gaming state. The time from when the three decorative symbols 55 come to a complete stop may be the same in all game states. On the other hand, the time from the start (or end) of the second light emitting effect until the three decorative symbols 55 come to a complete stop varies depending on the gaming state, while the time from the start (or end) of the first light emitting effect varies depending on the gaming state. ) until the three decorative symbols 55 come to a complete stop may be the same in all game states.

Further, in the case where a jackpot is announced by a role object operation effect instead of the symbol matching effect, the first light emission effect does not need to be performed during the role object operation effect. That is, when notifying a jackpot immediately after a deciding performance, if a movable accessory is used instead of the decorative pattern 55 to notify the jackpot, the first light emitting performance may not be performed. In this case, if a re-lottery effect is performed, the first light emission effect may be performed immediately after the re-lottery effect. Further, even when the re-lottery performance is performed, the first light emission performance does not need to be performed immediately after the re-lottery performance.

Furthermore, in the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect, even if the type of the three decorative patterns 55 to be stopped is the first decorative pattern (a decorative pattern suggesting a jackpot that is more advantageous for the player), the second light emitting effect is Even if it is a decorative pattern (a decorative pattern that suggests a jackpot that is not advantageous to the player). For example, even if three odd-numbered symbols (e.g., "3" symbols) are stopped together or three even-numbered symbols (e.g., "4" symbols) are stopped together, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect The performance is executed. Odd-numbered symbols are symbols that indicate a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than even-numbered symbols. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, if three odd-numbered symbols line up, it suggests a transition to the probability-variable gaming state after the jackpot game, and if three even-numbered symbols line up, it suggests a time reduction after the jackpot game. Indicates the possibility of transitioning to a gaming state. In addition, in the variable probability game state, when three "7" symbols are aligned, a 10R probability variable jackpot is suggested, and when three other symbols are aligned, a 4R probability variable jackpot is suggested. In the normal gaming state, the first light emitting effect and/or the second light emitting effect when three odd symbols are stopped together are the same as the first light emitting effect when three even symbols are stopped and /Or it may be different from or the same as the presentation mode of the second light emission effect. Further, the presentation mode of the first light emission effect may vary depending on the type of decorative pattern to be stopped, and the presentation mode may be the same for the second light emission effect regardless of the type of the decorative pattern to be stopped. On the contrary, the presentation mode of the second light emitting presentation may differ depending on the type of decorative pattern to be stopped, and the presentation mode may be the same for the first light emitting presentation regardless of the type of the decorative pattern to be stopped. Similarly, in the variable probability gaming state, there are cases in which three symbols indicating a 10R probability variable jackpot (a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player) are stopped, and a case in which 4R probability variable jackpots (a jackpot that is less advantageous than a 10R probability variable jackpot) are stopped. The presentation mode of the first light emission effect and/or the second light emission effect may be different depending on the case where three suggested symbols are stopped together.

In addition, as described above, in the variable probability game state, the first symbol combination (symbols aligned) indicates a variable probability jackpot, and after the symbols are aligned, a winning light emitting effect (first light emitting effect or second light emitting effect) is performed. This indicates that the second symbol combination (reach loser) usually indicates a jackpot, and indicates that a winning light emitting effect is not performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, a first decorative pattern indicating a 10R probability-variable jackpot or a 4R probability-variable jackpot (for example, an odd-numbered symbol other than "7"), and a second decorative symbol indicating the possibility of a 4R regular jackpot (for example, an even-numbered symbol) symbol) and a third decorative symbol (for example, a "7" symbol) indicating a 10R probability-variable jackpot. When three first decorative patterns are aligned and stopped, or when three second decorative patterns are aligned and stopped, the presentation mode of the first light emission effect is the first mode, and the third decoration mode is the first mode. When three symbols are aligned and stop, the presentation mode of the first light emission effect may be a second mode different from the first mode. In other words, if all the symbols other than the third decorative symbol, which suggests the most advantageous jackpot for the player, stop together, the presentation mode of the first light emitting effect is the same as the first one, regardless of which decorative pattern stops. If the third decorative patterns are aligned and stop, the presentation mode of the first light emitting presentation may be a second mode different from the first mode. Note that the performance mode of the second light emission performance may be the same regardless of which of the first to third decorative patterns stop together. In addition, the presentation mode of the second light emission effect is the same as the presentation mode of the first light emission effect, when the first or second decorative pattern stops, it is the first mode, and the third decorative pattern stops. If so, the second aspect may be used.

Further, when a jackpot is announced by matching the symbols, at least one of the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect is always executed in all game states. On the other hand, when a jackpot is not announced by matching the symbols (in the case of a reach loss or a jackpot accompanied by a transition to a normal game state in a variable probability game state), neither the first light-emitting performance nor the second light-emitting performance is executed. In addition, in the normal gaming state, the first light emitting effect and/or the second light emitting effect may be executed in the case of a normal jackpot, while in the variable probability gaming state, the first light emitting effect and/or the second light emitting effect may be executed in the case of a normal jackpot. Does not perform any of the performances.

Further, the output timing and output time of the sounds (first winning light emitting effect sound, second winning light emitting effect sound) that are output along with the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect may be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal game state, after the output of the first winning light emitting effect sound accompanying the first light emitting effect is finished, outputting of the second winning light emitting effect sound accompanying the second light emitting effect is started. On the other hand, in the variable probability game state, it may be possible to start outputting the second winning light emitting effect sound accompanying the second light emitting effect while outputting the first winning light emitting effect sound accompanying the first light emitting effect.

As described above, the winning light emitting effect (the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect) is executed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during the winning notification. Since the winning light emitting effect is terminated when the decorative pattern 55 comes to a final stop, it is possible to effectively notify the player of a jackpot without interfering with the visibility of the decorative pattern 55 when the decorative pattern 55 comes to a final stop. It is possible to improve the level of interest.

Although details will be described later, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, in addition to the winning light emitting effect during the winning notification, another light emitting effect is performed on the decorative pattern 55 at a timing different from that during the winning notification. By performing these various light emitting effects, various effects can be performed using decorative patterns at respective timings, and it is possible to increase the expectations of the players and improve the level of interest.

(Non-reach lighting effect)
Next, a non-reach lighting effect in this embodiment will be explained. The non-reach lighting performance is a performance that suggests that the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops during the variable display of the special pattern. In this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the non-reaching light emission effect is performed "when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed" in "when it is not in the ready-to-reach state". "Not in reach state" refers to cases where reach has never been established since the start of the variable display of the special symbol, or cases where the decorative symbol 55 is no longer in reach state due to the decorative symbol 55 starting variable display again after reach has been established. including cases. In addition, "when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed" refers to the case where the decorative pattern 55 is displayed (that is, the case where it is not hidden), the case where the decorative pattern 55 is displayed, and the case where the decorative pattern 55 is displayed. This includes the case immediately before.

In this embodiment, the non-reach mode light emitting effect is executed when the player is not in the reach state. That is, this can be executed when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a manner that does not notify that it is a jackpot. In this respect, the execution timing is different from the winning light emitting performance performed when displaying the decorative pattern 55 in the jackpot mode and the ready-to-win light emitting performance (described later) performed when displaying the decorative pattern 55 in the ready-to-win mode. In addition, the non-reach light-up performance differs in function from the chance performance that suggests reliability (i.e., the look-ahead chance performance and the chance performance, which will be described later) in that it does not suggest the reliability of a jackpot. Further, the non-reach light emission effect in this embodiment can be executed regardless of the variation pattern. In this respect, the execution conditions are different from the winning light emitting effect, the reach light emitting effect, and the chance eye effect.

When the non-reach light emitting effect is executed, an effect image (hereinafter referred to as "non-reach light emitting effect image 70") is superimposed and displayed in front of the decorative pattern 55 from the start to the end. (See Figure 39(F)). In addition, in conjunction with this, a non-reach light emitting effect sound (for example, a sound effect "shuon") is output from the speaker 24. In this embodiment, the display time of the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 and the output time of the non-reach light emitting effect sound are the same. Note that any relationship between these times may be used; for example, the output time may be shorter or longer than the display time.

The non-reach light emission effect image 70 and the non-reach light emission effect sound are output only in the non-reach light emission effect. The non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is an image smaller than the effect images 60 to 64 related to the winning light emitting effect. In this embodiment, the same non-standard pattern is applied to any of the left pattern, which is the decorative pattern 55 in the left row, the right pattern, which is the decorative pattern 55 in the right row, and the middle pattern, which is the decorative pattern 55 in the middle row. Light emitting sound is output during reach. For this reason, it is not known which symbol row the decorative symbol 55 to temporarily stop is in depending on the non-reach light emitting performance sound. On the other hand, the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is displayed centering on the pattern row of the decorative pattern 55 that suggests a temporary stop, but is not displayed centering on the pattern row that does not suggest a temporary stop. For example, in a non-reach mode lighting effect that suggests that the decorative pattern 55 in the middle row temporarily stops, the non-reach mode light effect image 70 is displayed centering on the middle row, and centering on the left column (and right column). Do not show. For example, a symbol row that does not suggest a temporary stop may be displayed so that only the edge part of the non-reaching light emitting effect image 70 is displayed, or may be displayed so that the non-reaching light emitting effect image 70 is not applied. good. Thereby, it is possible to suggest in which symbol row the decorative symbols 55 will be temporarily stopped by the non-reach lighting effect. Note that the mode of light emission during non-reach may be varied depending on the type of decorative pattern 55. For example, the "7" symbol may have a non-reach light emitting effect image 70 and a non-reach light emitting effect sound that are different from the other decorative symbols 55.

In this embodiment, during the non-reach light emission performance, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a light emission pattern (for example, white blinking) for the non-reach light emission performance. The light emission pattern for the non-reach light effect is different from the light emission pattern for other effects. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the non-reach light emission effect is being executed even from effect means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, regarding the non-reach light emission effect, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 correspond (are interlocked).

Note that the gaming machine 1 does not have to include the light emitting pattern of the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 for the non-reach light effect. In this case, during the non-reach lighting performance, the board lamp 25 uses a light emission pattern for other effects (for example, a light emission pattern corresponding to (linked to) the BGM that is being output, or a light emission pattern when displaying a normal background image). The frame lamp 37 may also emit light. In the case of such a configuration, it is impossible to recognize from any presentation means other than the liquid crystal screen 5 that the non-reach lighting effect is being executed. That is, regarding the non-reach light emission performance, it can be said that the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond (are not linked).

In this embodiment, the mode of the non-reach light emission effect differs depending on the gaming state. Specifically, for example, the execution time of the light-emitting performance itself during non-reach is shorter in the variable probability game state than in the normal game state. For example, the execution time in the normal gaming state is 1 second, and the execution time in the variable probability gaming state is 0.5 seconds. It should be noted that the execution time of the light-emitting effect during non-reach may be longer or the same in the case of the variable probability game state than in the case of the normal game state. In this embodiment, in any gaming state, the execution time of the non-reach light emission effect is shorter than the execution time of the winning light emission effect. Note that depending on the game state (or even in any game state), the execution time of the winning light emission effect may be shorter than the execution time of the non-reach light emission effect, or may be the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the non-reach light emitting effect image 70, in the normal game state, an effect (for example, a light yellow image) that makes the lower part of the corresponding decorative pattern 55 appear to shine is used as the corresponding decorative pattern. 55 (see FIG. 39(E)). In the case of the probability variable gaming state, an effect different from the above is displayed as the non-reach light emitting effect image 70. For example, an effect (for example, a white image) in which the corresponding decorative pattern 55 explodes from the bottom so that the entire object appears to be shining is displayed superimposed on the front side of the corresponding decorative pattern 55 (see FIG. 42). (C) and (D)). In this embodiment, the light emission effect sound during non-reach is the same regardless of the gaming state. However, in the normal gaming state, the output is output in a shorter output time than in the variable probability gaming state. Note that different non-reach light emitting effect sounds may be output depending on the gaming state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the "scroll speed" of the decorative pattern 55 when the non-reach light emission effect is started differs depending on the gaming state. Note that the "scroll speed" refers to the speed when the decorative pattern 55 is moved in the vertical direction, and the switching speed when the decorative pattern 55 is changed and displayed in the same place without vertical movement. It is a concept that includes For example, during the normal game state, the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is displayed for the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 55. During the probability change game state, the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is displayed for the decorative pattern 55 which is changing at low speed. The low speed fluctuation is, for example, the scrolling speed (fluctuation speed) of the decorative pattern 55 such that detailed aspects of the character image 551 and the number image 552 can be recognized (or easily recognized). For example, the time for one decorative pattern to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during high-speed fluctuation is approximately 0.5 seconds. Fast fluctuations are faster than slow fluctuations. The high-speed fluctuation is, for example, a scrolling speed (fluctuation speed) in which it is possible to recognize that the decorative pattern 55 is being displayed in a fluctuating manner, but the detailed aspects of the decorative pattern 55 cannot be recognized (or are difficult to recognize). For example, the time during which one decorative pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 during high-speed fluctuation is approximately 0.04 seconds. For example, the variation speed of the decorative symbol during high-speed variation is the same as the variation velocity of the small symbol 56 (and the fourth symbols 57, 59). In addition, in this embodiment, the decorative pattern during the temporary stop is not scrolled. Therefore, the scroll speed of the decorative pattern during the temporary stop is 0, and in this embodiment, the temporary stop is not included in the low speed fluctuation. In addition, when it is simply described as "display", it includes a temporary stop, a low speed fluctuation, and a high speed fluctuation. The variation speed of the small pattern 56 (and the fourth symbols 57, 59) may be faster than the variation speed of the decorative pattern 55 during high-speed variation, as long as it is faster than the variation speed of the decorative pattern 55 during low-speed variation. It may be too late.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40, the light emission effect during non-reach in the normal gaming state will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 38, the execution timing of the non-reach light emission effect in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 38 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the non-reach light emission performance in the normal gaming state. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a light-emitting effect during non-reach when three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop at the same time in the normal game state. FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a light-emitting effect during non-reach when three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop in order in the normal game state.

FIG. 38(A) shows the movement of the decorative pattern 55 when the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected. In this embodiment, when the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected, the production pattern of the decorative symbol 55 in which the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol temporarily stop at the same time is selected with a probability of 100%. In accordance with the variable display of the special symbols, in this embodiment, a start effect is executed in a mode according to the gaming state. The start performance in this embodiment is a performance that emphasizes the decorative pattern 55 that starts variable display by shaking the decorative pattern 55 (that is, slightly fluctuating). Further, the start effect is also an effect that suggests that the decorative pattern 55 starts to fluctuate at high speed. For example, the start effect in the normal game state is executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second), and the decorative pattern 55 is oscillated by changing the pose of the character image 551 from the start time to the end time. Further, in the starting presentation in the normal game state, the entire decorative pattern 55 bounces and becomes a little larger with the start of the presentation, and maintains the same size until the starting presentation ends. In this embodiment, the start performance ends with the character image 551 in a pose different from that at the start of the start performance (that is, a pose different from the pose during the main stop). As illustrated in FIG. 38(A), as the start performance ends, the decorative pattern 55 starts to fluctuate at high speed while maintaining the state at the end of the start performance (FIGS. 39(B) and (C)) reference). Regarding the size positioning in FIG. 18, the decorative pattern 55 before the start of the start performance (that is, during the main stop) is a small "medium", which is larger than "small". Further, the decorative pattern 55 that has become larger due to the start performance is a larger "medium" and smaller than "large". In this way, even when the start effect is executed, the decorative pattern 55 is in the same form at the start of variation and during high-speed variation in that the size is "medium" and the character is present. Note that, as a start effect, after the pose of the character image 551 has ended, an effect may be performed in which the character image 551 is changed to the same pose as during the main stop.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(A), in this embodiment, the three decorative symbols 55 simultaneously start changing at high speed with the end of the start effect. In the normal game state, the decorative pattern 55 changes at high speed while maintaining the size increased by the start effect and the pose of the character image 551 after moving (see FIG. 39(C)). Note that the decorative pattern 55 may vary at a low speed between the end of the start performance and the start of the high-speed variation. Further, the execution time of the start performance may be different for each symbol row. For example, if the execution time of the start performance is short in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, the high-speed fluctuation will start in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol. Further, the mode of the decorative pattern 55 during high-speed fluctuation may be the same as during the main stop. For example, with the end of the start effect, the mode of the decorative pattern 55 may be changed to the mode in full stop, and at the same time, high-speed fluctuation may be started.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(A), when a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of high-speed fluctuation, the three decorative patterns 55 simultaneously change from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. In this embodiment, the aspect of the decorative pattern 55 during low-speed fluctuation is the same as during high-speed fluctuation (see FIGS. 39(C) and (D)). During the low speed fluctuation, it is not yet known which decorative pattern 55 will temporarily stop. In addition, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol may start the slow fluctuation in this order, or the left symbol and the right symbol may start the slow fluctuation at the same time, and then the middle symbol may start the slow fluctuation with a delay. good.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(A), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed since the decorative pattern 55 started to fluctuate at low speed, the three decorative patterns 55 temporarily stop at the same time in a losing state due to reach failure. do. In the normal game state, as the decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped, the non-reach lighting performance for the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 55 (in this example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol) is performed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 seconds). This suggests that the three decorative patterns 55 will then temporarily stop for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds). When the losing variation pattern HP1 is selected, all the decorative symbols 55 are temporarily stopped from the start of the non-ready light-emitting performance until the decorative symbols 55 are finally stopped along with the variable display of the special symbols. Note that the decorative pattern 55 may suddenly stop temporarily from a high-speed fluctuation without intervening a low-speed fluctuation.

In the normal game state, a stop effect that changes the pose of the character image 551 is executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second) together with a non-reach light emission effect. The stop performance in this embodiment is a performance in which the character image 551 performs a different action (or the same action) as the start performance. In this embodiment, the character image 551 assumes a pose different from that at the start of the stop effect (specifically, for example, the same pose as during the main stop) and the stop effect ends (FIGS. 39(E) and (G)) ). When the stop performance ends, the temporarily stopped character image 551 swings by continuing to inhale and exhale while maintaining the pose at the end of the stop performance. The numeric image 552 oscillates, for example, by repeating a slight enlargement and a slight reduction, during a temporary stop, regardless of whether the stop effect is being performed or not. In this way, in the normal game state, the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops (swings) from the start of the light emission effect during the non-reach mode. Note that the size of the number image 552 may be made smaller (or larger) by the stop effect. Further, the execution time of the non-reaching light-emitting effect may be longer or shorter than that of the stop effect. Further, in the stop performance, at the end of the stop performance, the character image 551 may be changed to the same pose as at the end of the start performance.

In the present embodiment, when the losing variation pattern is selected in the normal game state, the three decorative symbols 55 are all deflated at the same time a predetermined time before the main stop (for example, 0.7 seconds), and it is assumed that the main stop is in progress. It becomes smaller to the same size (see FIG. 39(H)). When the decorative pattern 55 deflates as described above, the player can recognize that the fluctuation will not continue (that is, the game will not develop into a pseudo-run and will continue to lose). When the losing variation pattern HP1 is selected, the three decorative symbols 55 will deflate after a predetermined time (0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the non-reach light emission effect ends. In terms of size in FIG. 18, the decorative pattern 55 after being deflated is a "medium" size, which is larger than a "small" size. The decorative pattern 55 remains at this size and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.7 seconds), the decorative pattern 55 stops as the special pattern is stopped (see FIG. 39(I)). Note that when a predetermined performance (for example, SP ready-to-win performance or SPSP ready-to-win performance) is executed, the decorative pattern 55 does not need to be deflated as described above.

FIG. 38(B) shows the movement of the decorative pattern 55 when the loss variation pattern HP2 is selected. In this embodiment, when the loss variation pattern HP2 is selected, the performance pattern of the decorative symbol 55 that temporarily stops in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol is selected with a 100% probability.

When the loss variation pattern HP2 is selected, similarly to the case of HP1, a start performance is executed with the variation display of the special symbols, and then the three decorative symbols 55 are varied at high speed. Following the high-speed fluctuation, the left symbol first starts to fluctuate at a low speed. While the left symbol is fluctuating at low speed, the right symbol and middle symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a predetermined time (for example, 2.5 seconds) has elapsed since the left symbol started to fluctuate at low speed, the left symbol temporarily stops. Along with this, a non-reach lighting effect for the left symbol is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). At the same time, a stop effect that changes the pose of the character image 551 of the left pattern is executed at a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). In addition, as the left symbol temporarily stops, the right symbol begins to fluctuate at a low speed. Therefore, during the non-reach light emission performance for the left symbol, the left symbol is temporarily stopped (and is in the stop performance), the right symbol is fluctuating at low speed, and the middle symbol is fluctuating at high speed. In addition, the right symbol may change at a low speed after (or before) the start of the non-reach light emission performance for the left symbol.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(B), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed after the non-reach lighting performance for the left symbol ends, the right symbol that shows a different number from the left symbol temporarily stops. . Along with this, a non-reach light emission performance for the right symbol is executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). At the same time, a stop effect that changes the pose of the character image 551 of the right symbol is executed at a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). In addition, as the right symbol temporarily stops, the middle symbol begins to fluctuate at a low speed. Therefore, during the non-reach flash performance for the right symbol, the left symbol is temporarily stopped (and after the stop performance ends), the right symbol is temporarily stopped (and the stop performance is in progress), and the middle symbol is fluctuating at low speed. It's inside. In addition, the middle symbol may change at a low speed after (or before) the start of the non-reach light emission performance for the right symbol.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(B), when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed after the non-reach lighting performance for the right symbol is completed, the middle symbol temporarily stops. Along with this, a non-reach light emission effect for the medium symbol is executed in a predetermined execution time (for example, 1 second). At the same time, a stop effect that changes the pose of the middle symbol character image 551 is executed at a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). During the non-reach light emission performance for the middle symbol, the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped (and after the stop performance is finished), and the middle symbol is temporarily stopped (and the stop performance is in progress). When a predetermined period of time (0.3 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the non-reach light emitting effect for the medium symbol, the three decorative symbols 55 will be slightly deflated as a whole, as in the case where the loss variation pattern HP1 is selected. (see FIG. 40(G)). Then, the decorative pattern 55 comes to a permanent stop along with the stop display of the special pattern (see FIG. 40(H)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 38(A) will be described. FIG. 39(A) exemplifies the situation when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed while the first special symbol is on hold. At this time, the three decorative patterns 55 come to a final stop in a losing manner, and the small pattern 56 of the same combination as the decorative pattern 55 comes to a final stop. Further, along with this, fourth symbols 57 and 59 indicating a loss are stopped and displayed. In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 39(A), the middle symbol of the decorative symbol 55 in the losing mode may be permanently stopped at the upper side of the screen than the left symbol (and the right symbol). In addition, when the decorative symbols 55 in the jackpot mode are temporarily stopped (and permanently stopped), the three decorative symbols 55 are lined up in a straight line. The small symbols 56 are always stopped in a straight line regardless of whether it is a jackpot or not. Incidentally, like the small symbols 56, the decorative symbols 55 may always be stopped in a straight line regardless of whether or not there is a jackpot. In addition, the middle symbol during the main stop may be displayed superimposed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol, or may be displayed superimposed on the back side.

In the example of FIG. 39(A), a pending number 52 is displayed at the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen 5. In this example, the pending number 52 indicates that the pending number for the first special symbol determination is 3, and the pending number for the second special symbol determination is 0. It is assumed that the number of pending special symbol determinations does not increase during the performance illustrated in the figure. When a predetermined fixed stop period (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the first special symbol was stopped and displayed, a start effect is started along with the variable display of the first special symbol. FIG. 39(B) illustrates how the character image 551 moves and the decorative pattern 55 becomes larger due to the start performance. As illustrated in FIG. 39(B), in this embodiment, when the start effect is started in the normal gaming state, the middle symbol is displayed superimposed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol. Moreover, the small pattern 56 starts to fluctuate at high speed with the start of the start effect. At the same time, an animation is displayed in which the pending icon 51 is moved to the right so that the earliest pending icon 51 is displayed as the changing icon 53. At the same time, the value of the numeric reservation 52 indicating the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is decreased by 1.

As is clear from comparing FIGS. 39A and 39B, the size of the decorative pattern 55 is larger during the start performance than during the main stop. Moreover, as illustrated in FIG. 39(C), the decorative pattern 55 during high-speed fluctuation is the same as at the end of the start performance. Note that, as illustrated in FIG. 39(B), the decorative symbols 55 other than the decorative symbols 55 that have been at the main stop are not displayed during the main stop and during the start effect, and are not displayed when the high-speed fluctuation starts. Ru.

As illustrated in FIGS. 39(C) to 39(E), the decorative symbols 55 that fluctuated at high speed as the start performance ends, temporarily stop three decorative symbols 55 at the same time through low-speed fluctuations. During low speed fluctuations and temporary stops, the middle symbol is superimposed on the front side of the left symbol and the right symbol. Since FIG. 39 is an example where the loss fluctuation pattern HP1 is selected, the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in a non-reachable loss mode. When the non-reach light emission effect is executed for each decorative pattern 55 due to the temporary stop, the non-reach light emission effect image 70 causes the three decorative patterns 55 to be displayed as shown in FIGS. The bottom part looks shiny. FIG. 39(E) illustrates how the non-reaching light emission effect and the stop effect are started in response to the temporary stop. Moreover, FIG. 39(F) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 39(E) (in addition, during the non-reaching light emission performance and during the stop performance). Moreover, FIG. 39(G) illustrates the situation immediately after the end of the non-reach light emission effect and the stop effect. As illustrated in FIGS. 39(G) to (I), the decorative pattern 55 deflates during the temporary stop and then comes to the final stop. The small symbols fluctuate at high speed until the decorative symbol 55 comes to a final stop, regardless of whether the non-reach light emitting effect is executed or not. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 38(B) will be described. Similar to FIG. 39(B), FIG. 40(A) exemplifies how the start performance is started in conjunction with the variable display of special symbols. In addition, in this example, as shown by the pending number 52, the pending number of the first special symbol determination is 1, and the pending number of the second special symbol determination is 0. It is assumed that the number of pending special symbol determinations does not increase during the performance illustrated in the figure. FIG. 40(B) exemplifies how, among the decorative symbols 55 that fluctuated at high speed with the end of the start performance, the left symbol starts to fluctuate at low speed before the right symbol and the middle symbol. FIG. 40(C) exemplifies how, when displaying the left symbol, a non-reach lighting effect corresponding to the left symbol is executed. In the example of FIG. 40(C), during the non-reach light emission performance for the left symbol, the character image 551 of the left symbol moves due to the stop performance using the left symbol. At this time, the right symbol is fluctuating at low speed, and the middle symbol is fluctuating at high speed. As illustrated in FIG. 40(D), the low-speed fluctuation of the right symbol continues until after the end of the non-reach lighting performance for the left symbol (see FIG. 38(B)).

FIG. 40(E) exemplifies how a non-reach lighting performance corresponding to the right symbol is executed when the right symbol is temporarily stopped. In the example of FIG. 40(E), during the non-reach light emission performance for the right symbol, the character image 551 of the right symbol moves due to the stop performance using the right symbol. At this time, the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is fluctuating at low speed. FIG. 40(F) exemplifies how a non-reach lighting performance corresponding to the middle symbol is executed when the middle symbol is temporarily stopped. In the example of FIG. 40(F), during the non-reach medium light emission performance for the medium symbol, the character image 551 of the medium symbol moves due to the stop performance using the medium symbol. At this time, all decorative patterns 55 are temporarily stopped. In addition, the middle symbol is superimposed on the left symbol and the right symbol in front of the left symbol and the right symbol during high-speed fluctuation, low-speed fluctuation, and temporary stop. As illustrated in FIGS. 40(G) and (H), the decorative pattern 55 deflates during the temporary stop and then comes to the final stop.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43, the light emission effect during non-reach in the variable probability gaming state will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 41, the execution timing of the non-reach light emission performance in the variable probability gaming state will be explained. FIG. 41 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the non-reach light emission performance in the variable probability gaming state. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a light-emitting performance during non-reach when three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop at the same time in a variable probability game state. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a light-emitting performance during non-reach when three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop in sequence in a variable probability game state.

FIG. 41(A) shows the movement of the decorative symbol 55 when the loss variation pattern HP4-2 is selected. In this embodiment, when the loss variation pattern HP4-2 is selected, the production pattern of the decorative symbol 55 in which the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol temporarily stop at the same time is selected with a 100% probability.

As illustrated in FIG. 41(A), in this embodiment, in the case of the variable probability game state, the start performance is executed in a manner different from the normal game state in conjunction with the variable display of special symbols. The start performance in the variable probability gaming state is executed in a shorter execution time (for example, 0.2 seconds) than in the normal gaming state. For example, in the starting performance in the variable probability game state, the decorative pattern 55 performs an action such as jumping upward (see FIG. 43(A)). At this time, unlike in the normal game state, the size and shape of the decorative pattern 55 do not change. With the end of the start performance, the decorative pattern 55 starts to fluctuate at high speed (see FIG. 43(B)). In addition, even in the case of a variable probability game state, the size and shape of the decorative pattern 55 may be changed by the starting effect. In addition, in the case of a variable probability game state, the decorative symbols 55 may vary rapidly in a manner in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the decorative symbols 55 are fluctuating rapidly (for example, in a manner in which they fluctuate rapidly for only 0.1 seconds), or It doesn't have to change.

As illustrated in FIG. 41(A), when a predetermined time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the start of high-speed fluctuation, the three decorative patterns 55 simultaneously change from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation. The aspect (for example, shape and size) of the decorative pattern 55 during high-speed fluctuation and low-speed fluctuation is the same as during the main stop. In addition, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol may start the slow fluctuation in this order, or the left symbol and the right symbol may start the slow fluctuation at the same time, and then the middle symbol may start the slow fluctuation with a delay. good.

As illustrated in FIG. 41(A), when a predetermined time (for example, 0.4 seconds) has elapsed since the decorative pattern 55 started to fluctuate at low speed, the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol (all of which are in the process of slow fluctuation) ) is executed during non-reach. The non-ready-to-reach light-emitting performance in the variable probability game state is started during the low-speed fluctuation of the decorative symbols 55 in a shorter execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds) than in the normal game state. This suggests that the three decorative patterns 55 that are changing at low speed will then temporarily stop for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds). The three decorative patterns 55 that are changing at low speed temporarily stop at the same time in a losing mode when the reach is not established during the non-reach light emission performance. Then, for example, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the three decorative patterns 55 temporarily stop, the non-reach lighting performance ends. When the losing variation pattern HP4-2 is selected, the decorative symbol 55 comes to a stop with the stop display of the special symbol after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the end of the non-reach light emission performance. In this embodiment, the stop performance is not executed in the variable probability gaming state, unlike in the normal gaming state.

FIG. 41(B) shows the movement of the decorative pattern 55 when the loss variation pattern HP4-1 or HP4-3 is selected. In this embodiment, when the above-mentioned variation pattern is selected, the effect pattern of the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stopping in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol is selected with a probability of 100%.

As illustrated in FIG. 41(B), when loss fluctuation pattern HP4-1 or HP4-3 is selected, HP4-2 changes from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation in the order of left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol. The case is different. For example, during the low-speed fluctuation of the left symbol, a non-reach lighting performance for the left symbol is started at a predetermined execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds). At this time, the right symbol and the middle symbol are fluctuating at high speed. At the end of the non-reach light emission performance for the left symbol, the left symbol is temporarily stopped, the right symbol is in low speed fluctuation, and the middle symbol remains in high speed fluctuation. Thereafter, during the low-speed fluctuation of the right symbol, a non-reach lighting performance for the right symbol is started at a predetermined execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds). At this time, the left symbol is temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed. At the end of the non-reach lighting performance for the right symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is fluctuating at low speed. Thereafter, during the low-speed fluctuation of the medium symbol, a non-reach lighting performance for the medium symbol is started at a predetermined execution time (for example, 0.4 seconds). At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped. At the end of the non-reaching light emitting performance for the middle symbol, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped, and the middle symbol is fluctuating at a low speed. When loss fluctuation pattern HP4-1 or 4-3 is selected, the special symbol will be decorated with a stop display after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 seconds) after the non-reach lighting effect for the medium symbol ends. The symbol 55 stops.

Comparing FIG. 38 and FIG. 41, the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern 55 from the execution of the non-reach light-emitting effect until the actual stop is longer in the normal game state than in the variable probability game state. . In this embodiment, the temporary stop period of the decorative symbols 55 from when the non-reach light-emitting effect is executed until the actual stop in the normal gaming state is the temporary stop period of the decorative symbols 55 from when the winning light-emitting effect is executed until the actual stop. shorter than the temporary suspension period. In addition, the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol 55 from the execution of the light-emitting effect during non-reach until the actual stop may be the same regardless of the game state, and it is better in the normal game state than in the variable probability game state. It can also be short.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 41(A) will be described. In FIG. 42(A), when the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is 0 and the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination is 3, the start performance is started with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. This shows an example of how it is started. The small symbol 56 starts to fluctuate at high speed with the start of the start effect. It is assumed that the number of pending special symbol determinations does not increase during the performance illustrated in the figure. As illustrated in FIG. 42(A), in this embodiment, even if the start effect is started in the variable probability game state, the aspect (for example, shape) of the decorative pattern 55 is different from that in the main stop, unlike in the normal game state. do not have.

As illustrated in FIG. 42(C), in the variable probability game state, the decorative symbols 55 change at high speed as the start performance ends, as in the normal game state. After that, when the decorative pattern 55 changes at a low speed, a non-reach light emitting effect is executed for each of the three decorative patterns 55. Thereby, as illustrated in FIGS. 42(C) and (D), the three decorative patterns 55 appear to shine due to the non-reach light emitting effect image 70. FIG. 42(C) shows an example in which a non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is displayed superimposed on the decorative pattern 55 during low speed fluctuation, and a non-reach light emitting effect sound is output from the speaker 24. Further, FIG. 43(D) illustrates a state in which a non-reach light emitting effect image 70 is displayed superimposed on the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 55, and a non-reach light emitting effect sound is output from the speaker 24. There is. Moreover, FIG. 42(E) illustrates the situation immediately after the end of the non-reach light emission effect. As illustrated in FIG. 42(F), the decorative pattern 55 comes to a full stop in the same manner as during the non-ready light emission performance along with the stop display of the second special symbol. The small symbols fluctuate at high speed until the decorative symbol 55 comes to a final stop, regardless of whether the non-reach light emitting effect is executed or not. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a specific example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 41(B) will be described. Similar to FIG. 42(B), FIG. 43(A) illustrates how the start effect is started in conjunction with the variable display of special symbols. In addition, in this example, as shown by the pending number 52, the pending number for the first special symbol determination is 0, and the pending number for the second special symbol determination is 2. It is assumed that the number of pending special symbol determinations does not increase during the performance illustrated in the figure. FIG. 43(B) illustrates how the decorative pattern 55 changes at high speed as the start performance ends. Moreover, FIG. 43(C) illustrates how the non-reach light emission performance is executed for the left symbol that has started low-speed fluctuation prior to the right symbol and the middle symbol. FIG. 43(C) exemplifies how the reach promotion effect is executed after the non-reach light emission effect for the left symbol is completed. In the example of FIG. 43(C), an effect for increasing the reach that appears to emit light as if the right symbol is about to stop due to friction is displayed so as to extend from the bottom end of the right symbol to the left and right. FIG. 43(E) illustrates how the right symbol slides as soon as the reach promotion effect ends. FIG. 43(F) exemplifies how the non-reach light emission performance is executed for the right symbol that is changing at a low speed and shows a different number from the left symbol. This allows the player to recognize that a reach is achieved. When the non-reaching light emitting effect for the right symbol is completed, the non-reaching light emitting effect is applied to the middle symbol during the period from the low speed fluctuation of the middle symbol to the temporary stop, as illustrated in FIGS. 43 (G) and (H). is executed. As illustrated in FIGS. 43(I) and (J), after the decorative pattern 55 corresponding to the non-ready light-emitting effect temporarily stops, the decorative pattern 55 permanently stops along with the stop display of the second special pattern.

FIG. 44 is a table for explaining the total number of non-reach lighting effects for each variation pattern in the normal gaming state. As illustrated in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, in response to the variation patterns (HP1 and HP3) corresponding to simple losses in which pseudo-connection cannot be performed, a non-reach lighting effect is performed once for each decorative symbol. It is doable. Corresponding to a variation pattern (HP2) corresponding to a simple loss in which a pseudo series can be executed once, a non-reach light emission performance can be executed twice for each decorative symbol. In addition, in a variation pattern corresponding to a simple loss in which a pseudo-connection can be executed once, for example, the three decorative patterns 55 are temporarily displayed as in FIGS. 39(A) to 39(G) or FIGS. After stopping, the pseudo link is executed in the same flow as in FIG. 61. As each decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops during the first fluctuation and the first re-fluctuation, a non-ready light emission effect is executed.

In this embodiment, the non-ready-to-reach light emission effect can be executed regardless of the gaming state not only when the ready-to-win effect is not executed during the variable display of special symbols but also when the ready-to-reach effect is executed. When the reach effect is executed, from the start of the pre-reach effect to the "reach notification", the non-reach effect is performed as the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops, as in the examples of FIGS. 38 to 43. It is doable. Note that the "reach notification" in this embodiment is an effect that outputs an effect sound from the speaker 24 in order to emphasize that a reach has been achieved. For example, in reach notification, the speaker 24 outputs a production sound (for example, a sound saying "reach") that basically does not suggest the reliability of a jackpot. When the reliability of the jackpot is high, a performance sound different from the above-mentioned performance sound (for example, a performance sound of "chance") may be output from the speaker 24 as reach notification. In this embodiment, reach notification can be executed regardless of the gaming state.

As illustrated in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, a variation pattern in which a pseudo-link cannot be executed and a reach effect can be executed (in this embodiment, any (or all) of OP1 to 4 and RP1 to 4) Correspondingly, the left symbol and the right symbol can perform a non-reach lighting effect once each. On the other hand, the non-ready light emission performance corresponding to the middle symbol is performed 0 times (that is, cannot be performed). For example, the non-reach performance corresponding to the left symbol is executed during the pre-reach performance. The non-reach lighting performance corresponding to the right symbol is executed when the reach is established (immediately before the reach notification). In addition, the left and right symbols correspond to a variation pattern (in this embodiment, any (or all) of OP1 to 4 and RP1 to 4) that can perform one pseudo series and reach effect. It is possible to perform the non-reach lighting effect twice each. For example, the non-reach light emission performance is executed during the first fluctuation and the first re-fluctuation before the pseudo-link is executed. On the other hand, the non-ready light emission effect corresponding to the middle symbol is performed once, and is executed at the first variation. In addition, in response to a variation pattern (in this embodiment, any (or all) of OP1 to 4 and RP1 to 4) that can perform two pseudo-combinations and a reach effect, the left and right symbols are It is possible to perform the non-reach lighting effect three times each. For example, the non-reach light emission performance is performed during the first fluctuation and the first and second re-fluctuations before the pseudo series is executed. On the other hand, the non-ready light emission performance corresponding to the medium symbol is executed twice, with the first variation and the first re-variation. In addition, in response to the fluctuation pattern for the jackpot that can perform three pseudo-runs and the reach effect (in this embodiment, any (or all) of OP1 to 4), the non-reach effect is as follows: It is possible to execute two pseudo-runs and a reach effect at the same timing as in the case of an executable variation pattern. In this embodiment, a jackpot is confirmed when the pseudo-series is executed three times. For this reason, in order to emphasize the third re-variation more than the non-reach light emission performance, a configuration is adopted in which the non-reach light emission performance is not performed during the third re-variation.

FIG. 45 is a table for explaining the total number of non-reach light-emitting effects for each variation pattern in the variable probability gaming state. In addition, in this embodiment, a pseudo combination is not executed in the variable probability gaming state. Therefore, the number of executions of pseudo-association is 0 for any variation pattern. As exemplified in FIG. 45, it is possible to execute the non-reach lighting performance once for each decorative symbol in response to the variation pattern corresponding to a simple loss (HP4-2 in this embodiment). In addition, in response to the variation patterns (OP5-1, OP5-2, OP6, and RP5 in this embodiment) that can perform reach effects (that is, battle effects), the left symbol executes a non-reach effect once. It is possible. On the other hand, the non-ready light emission performance corresponding to the right symbol and the middle symbol is performed 0 times (that is, cannot be executed). In the variable probability gaming state, when a reach is achieved, the player has a higher expectation for a jackpot than in the normal gaming state. For this reason, in this embodiment, in order to emphasize the reach establishment more than the non-reach light emission performance, a configuration is adopted in which the non-reach light emission performance corresponding to the right symbol is not executed when the reach formation is established. In addition, even in the probability variable gaming state, as in the case of the normal gaming state, a non-reaching light emission performance corresponding to the right symbol may be executed before the reach notification.

Comparing FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, the left symbol can perform a non-reach light emission effect regardless of the gaming state and the type of variation pattern. In addition, regarding the left symbol, the number of times the non-reach light emission performance can be executed is smaller for the middle symbol than for the left symbol, regardless of the gaming state. The right symbol is played the same number of times as the left symbol in the normal gaming state, and the same number of times as the middle symbol in the variable probability gaming state.

Incidentally, regardless of the gaming state, if the ready-to-reach effect is executed, the non-ready-to-reach light emission effect does not need to be executed. In addition, in the normal game state, if the reach effect is executed, the non-reach effect can be executed, and in the variable probability game state, if the reach effect (i.e. battle effect) is executed, the non-reach effect can be executed. It may be impossible to perform the performance.

In this embodiment, the rate at which the non-reach light emitting effect is executed for the decorative symbols 55 that are changing at low speed during the normal game state is 0%. That is, in the normal game state, the proportion of the scrolling speed of the decorative pattern 55 being 0 (that is, temporarily stopped) at the start of the non-reach light-emitting performance is higher than the proportion of the scrolling being being scrolled. In addition, in stage A, it may be possible to perform a non-reach light emission effect on the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 55. Further, in stage B, it may be possible to perform a non-reach lighting effect on the decorative pattern 55 that is changing at a low speed. With such a configuration, in the normal game state, the proportion of the scroll speed of the decorative pattern 55 that is not 0 at the start of the non-reach light emission performance can be made 0% or more. In addition, it may be possible to perform a non-reach light emission effect on the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 55 in the variable probability game state.

In addition, in the normal mode, stage A may be able to execute a light emission effect during non-reach, and stage B may not be able to execute a light emission effect during non-reach. In such a configuration, during the variable display of special symbols, in the normal game state, it is possible to execute the non-reach lighting effect with a 50% probability (that is, the probability of being in stage A), while in the variable probability game state It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect during non-reach with a 100% probability.

In addition, when the loss variation pattern HP1 (or HP2) is selected, the production control unit 130 selects one of the patterns shown in (A) and (B) of FIG. 38 in response to receiving the variation start command. The production pattern may be determined by random number lottery.

In addition, there may be a production pattern in which the right symbol temporarily stops together with the left symbol, and then the middle symbol temporarily stops, or a production pattern in which the left symbol temporarily stops and then the right symbol and the middle symbol simultaneously temporarily stop. .

In addition, the background image for the non-reaching light emitting effect may be superimposed on the front side of the normal background image when the non-reaching light emitting effect starts, so that the normal background image appears to be emitting light. . The background image for the non-reach lighting effect may be erased with the start of the special symbol's regular stop immediately after (or just before the start), or may be erased at the start of the next variation. In the case of such a configuration, the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 may or may not be displayed in a superimposed manner on the front side of the decorative pattern 55 by the non-reach light emission effect.

Note that the non-ready light emission effect may be started while the decorative pattern 55 is not displayed. In this case, the decorative pattern 55 may be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) before the non-reach lighting effect ends (or as it ends), or the decorative pattern 55 may be displayed after the non-reach lighting effect ends. may be displayed (for example, temporary stop).

In addition, when the decorative pattern 55 is not displayed, the non-reach light emission performance may be started in conjunction with displaying the decorative pattern 55 (for example, temporarily stopped).

As a starting effect, an effect (for example, a white image) that makes the entire decorative pattern 55 appear to shine may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of each decorative pattern 55.

(Reach lighting effect)
Next, the reach light emission effect in this embodiment will be explained. The reach lighting performance is a performance that emphasizes that a reach has been achieved. In this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the ready-to-reach light emission effect is performed when the decorative symbol 55 is displayed (temporarily stopped) in the ready-to-win state. That is, the ready-to-reach light emission effect can be executed when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a manner that does not notify that it is a jackpot. The reach lighting effect can be executed regardless of whether the player wins or loses, as long as the variable pattern allows the reach effect to be executed. In this respect, it is different from the winning light emitting performance that can be executed when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a manner to notify that it is a jackpot in the case of a jackpot fluctuation pattern.

The reach-to-reach light emission performance in this embodiment includes a first reach-to-reach symbol light-emission performance, a second reach-to-reach symbol light-emission performance, and a reach-to-reach line performance. For example, when displaying the decorative pattern 55 in the reach state (specifically, at a timing corresponding to the reach state), the first reach symbol light-emitting effect creates an effect image 80 in which the left symbol and the right symbol appear to emit light. This is the effect to be displayed (see FIGS. 48(C) to (G)). In the first reach symbol light-emitting performance, for example, one effect image 80 is displayed superimposed on the front side of the decorative symbol 55 for the left symbol and the right symbol at the same time. In this embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol simultaneously emit light in the same light emitting manner by the first reach symbol light emitting effect. It should be noted that an effect sound (for example, a sound effect called "Kan") may be output from the speaker 24 in conjunction with the display of the effect image 80. The first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance is executed for a longer execution time than the ready-to-reach notification, for example, with the start of the ready-to-win notification. The first reach symbol light-emitting performance is a performance that does not suggest the reliability of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance is a performance that can be executed regardless of the gaming state. The first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance in the variable probability game state is executed while the medium symbol is not displayed (see FIG. 53(C)). On the other hand, the first reach symbol light-emitting effect in the normal gaming state is executed while the middle symbol is displayed (see FIGS. 48(C) to 48(G)). However, the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting effect is never performed on the middle symbol (that is, the middle symbol does not appear to be emitting light). The effect image 80 may be different or the same depending on the gaming state. Note that as the effect image 80, one image covering the left symbol and the right symbol may be displayed. Note that the effect image 80 may be displayed once during one first reach symbol light-emitting performance, or may be displayed intermittently multiple times (the same image or different images may be used). Furthermore, the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect may be executed while the middle symbol is being displayed regardless of the gaming state.

In this embodiment, during the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a light-emitting pattern for the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance. The light emitting pattern for the first reach symbol light emitting effect is different from the light emitting patterns for other effects. For this reason, it is possible to recognize that the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance is being executed even from performance means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, regarding the first reach symbol light emitting performance, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 correspond (are interlocked). In addition, a color indicating the level of reliability may be used for the light emitting pattern for the first reach symbol light emitting effect. The light emitting pattern in this case may be determined by random number lottery based on the result of special symbol determination by the production control unit 130, may be determined uniquely according to the type of reach effect, or may be determined uniquely according to the type of reach effect, or may be decided by the effect control unit 130 based on the result of special symbol determination. It may be determined uniquely depending on the type of decorative pattern 55.

The second reach symbol light-emitting effect is, for example, an effect displaying an effect image 82 in which the left symbol and the right symbol appear to emit light when displaying the decorative symbol 55 in the reach state in the normal gaming state (Fig. 49 (See (L)). In the second reach symbol light-emitting performance, for example, one effect image 82 is displayed superimposed on the front side of the decorative symbol 55 for the left symbol and the right symbol at the same time. In this embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol simultaneously emit light in the same light emitting manner by the second reach symbol light emitting effect. Incidentally, an effect sound (for example, a sound effect of "shun") may be output from the speaker 24 in conjunction with the display of the effect image 82. The second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance is executed in a shorter execution time than the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, for example. The second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, unlike the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, can be performed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the ready-to-win symbol is established (in this embodiment, during the SP development performance or during the SPSP development performance). It should be noted that both the SP development performance and the SPSP development performance are one of the reach performances that make you expect a jackpot. The second reach symbol light-up effect is a performance that is executed while the middle symbol is not displayed, and the second reach symbol light-emission effect is not executed for the middle symbol (in other words, the middle symbol appears to be emitting light). (not visible). The second reach symbol light-emitting performance is a performance that does not suggest the reliability of a jackpot. In this embodiment, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance cannot be performed in the case of a variable probability gaming state.

In this embodiment, during the second reach symbol light-emitting performance, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame The lamp 37 emits light. The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment does not include a light emitting pattern for the second reach symbol light emitting effect. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize that the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance is being executed from any performance means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, regarding the second ready-to-reach symbol light emitting performance, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond (are not interlocked).

In the reach line effect, for example, when displaying the decorative symbol 55 in the reach state in the normal gaming state (in this embodiment, at the same time as the first reach symbol light emission effect), the left and right symbols appear to emit light. This is an effect that displays a reach line image 81 (see FIGS. 48(C) to 48(F)). In addition, since the medium symbol during the reach line performance is changing at high speed (or low speed fluctuation), it does not appear that the medium symbol is emitting light even if the reach line performance is executed. The reach line performance, for example, starts with the start of the reach notification (and the first reach symbol light emission performance), and ends with the end of the reach notification. Then, after the reach line performance ends, the first reach symbol light emission performance ends. Thus, in this embodiment, the display time during which the reach line image 81 is displayed by the reach line effect is the same as the time during which the effect sound related to the reach notification is output from the speaker 24. Further, in this embodiment, the display time of the reach line image 81 is shorter than the display time of the effect image 80 related to the first reach symbol light emission effect. Note that the reach line image 81 may be displayed for the same period as the effect image 80. Furthermore, the reach line performance may be executed after the first reach symbol light emission performance ends (for example, one second later). In this case, the reach notification may start with the start of the first reach symbol light emission effect, or may start with the start of the reach line effect. In addition, even in the variable probability game state, the ready-to-win line performance may be executed in accordance with the establishment of the ready-to-win (for example, in conjunction with the first ready-to-win symbol light emission performance).

In the reach line performance in this embodiment, a default reach line image 81 that basically does not suggest reliability for a jackpot is superimposed and displayed on the near side of the decorative pattern 55 over the left pattern and the right pattern. When the confidence level for a jackpot is high, an image including the words "Chance" is displayed as the reach line image 81, for example. This reach line image 81 is an image that suggests higher reliability than the default reach line image 81, and is similar to the production sound output from the speaker 24 due to the reach notification (for example, the sound of "chance"). Represents the same content. In this embodiment, the reach line effect can be executed in the normal gaming state (that is, it cannot be executed in the variable probability gaming state). Incidentally, the reach line performance may be executed in the case of a variable probability gaming state. Note that the reach line image 81 may use a color that indicates the level of reliability.

In this embodiment, during the reach line performance, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a light emission pattern for the reach line performance. The light emitting pattern for the reach line effect is different from the light emitting pattern for other effects. Further, the light emitting pattern for the reach line effect is, for example, a light emitting pattern that can be output simultaneously in a distinguishable manner from the light emitting pattern for the first reach symbol light emitting effect. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the reach line performance is being executed even from performance means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, regarding the reach line effect, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 correspond (are interlocked). As an example, the extension line of both left and right ends of the reach line image 81 appears to shine in the same color as the reach line image 81 due to the light emitting pattern for the reach line effect, and the other parts are the light emitting pattern for the first reach symbol light emission effect. It may also emit light. Note that a color indicating the level of reliability may be used for the light emitting pattern for the reach line effect. The light emitting pattern in this case may be determined uniquely depending on the type of reach line image 81, or may be determined by a random number lottery based on the result of special symbol determination by the performance control unit 130 regardless of the type of reach line image 81. It may be decided. Further, it may be uniquely determined depending on the type of reach effect, or it may be uniquely determined depending on the type of decorative pattern 55 forming the reach.

The effect image 80, the effect image 82, and the reach line image 81 are mutually different images. These images 80 to 82 are displayed only in the reach light emission effect. The effect image 80 is, for example, an image larger than the decorative pattern 55 of "medium" size, and is an image in which the center part of the decorative pattern 55 appears to be white and the peripheral part appears to emit yellow light (see FIG. 48). (See C) to (G)). The effect image 82 is smaller than the effect image 80 and is a white image that diagonally crosses the decorative pattern 55 (see FIG. 48(L)). The reach line image 81 is a horizontally elongated image that is smaller than the effect image 80 and larger than the effect image 82 (see FIGS. 48C to 48F). Images 80 to 82 are displayed superimposed on both the left and right symbols in the same way. Therefore, when these images are displayed, the visibility is the same for the left and right symbols. Further, images 80 to 82 are smaller than effect images 60 to 64 related to the winning light emission effect. Note that a reduced version of the effect image 62 may be displayed as the effect image 82. Note that the modes of the images 80 to 82 may be changed depending on the type of the decorative pattern 55. For example, images 80 to 82 may be displayed for the "7" pattern which are different from those for the other decorative patterns 55.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the execution time of the ready-to-reach symbol lighting performance itself (that is, the total execution time of the first ready-to-win symbol lighting production and the second ready-to-reach symbol lighting production) is longer than that in the normal game state. It is shorter if it is a state. For example, the execution time in the normal gaming state is 3 seconds, and the execution time in the variable probability gaming state is 1 second. It should be noted that the execution time of the ready-to-reach light emission effect may be longer or the same in the variable probability gaming state than in the normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, in any game state, the execution time of the reach light emission effect is shorter than the execution time of the winning light emission effect. Note that depending on the game state (or even in any game state), the execution time of the winning light emission effect may be longer than the execution time of the reach light emission effect, or may be the same.

In this embodiment, as described above, the reach effect can be executed when the variation time of the special symbol is relatively long. Here, even with highly reliable SPSP reach performance, the expectation level is 30-50%. For this reason, even if the reach effect is executed, the overall percentage of jackpots is less than half. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the fluctuation time is long, the appearance rate of the reach light emission effect is higher than the appearance rate of the winning light emission effect.

Note that the ready-to-reach light emission effect may be started while the decorative pattern 55 is not displayed. In this case, the decorative symbol 55 in the ready-to-reach state may be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped) before the reach-to-reach lighting performance ends (or as it ends), or the decorative symbol 55 may be displayed after the reach-to-reach lighting performance ends. It may be displayed (for example, temporarily stopped).

In addition, when the decorative pattern 55 is not displayed, the ready-to-reach light emission effect may be started in conjunction with displaying the decorative pattern 55 (for example, temporarily stopped).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51, the ready-to-reach light emission effect in the normal gaming state will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47, the execution timing of the ready-to-reach light emission performance in the normal gaming state will be described. FIG. 46 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect in the normal gaming state. FIG. 47 is a time chart for explaining the execution timing of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance and the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance in the normal gaming state.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 46, the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance and the ready-to-reach line display are executed as the ready-to-reach light-emitting performance, and the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance is not executed. In the example illustrated in FIG. 47, a first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting performance, a ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting performance, and a second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance are executed as the ready-to-reach light emitting performance. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach line performance is executed at the same timing as the reach notification. For this reason, in FIGS. 46 and 47, illustration of the reach line effect is omitted. Note that the flow of performance during win notification and loss notification has been described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 32, so the description will be omitted in FIGS. 46 and 47.

FIG. 46(A) shows a case where a variation pattern is selected in which a win or loss is announced with the N reach effect (that is, the N reach effect does not develop into the SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, or special effect) during the reach effect. The flow of the performance is described. In response to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46(A), the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect can be performed, but the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect cannot be performed. In this embodiment, the N reach effect is started during the reach notification and the first reach symbol light emission effect. In addition, the N reach effect may be started with the formation of a reach, or may be started with the start (or end) of the first reach symbol light emission effect. Further, the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect may be executed in conjunction with the establishment of a ready-to-win.

In FIG. 46(B), a variation pattern is selected in which the N reach effect is not executed and the win or loss is notified by the SP reach effect (that is, the SP reach effect does not develop into the SPSP reach effect or the special effect). The flow of the performance during the reach performance in the case of In response to such a fluctuation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46(B), the first reach symbol lighting effect can be performed depending on the reach formation, but the second reach symbol light emission effect cannot be performed. It is. In addition, in this embodiment, during the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting effect, the SP development effect is started with the end of the ready-to-reach notification. Further, after the first reach symbol light emitting performance ends, the SP development performance ends, and in conjunction with this, the SP reach performance starts.

Figure 46 (C) shows the flow of the performance during the reach effect when the N reach effect and/or the SP reach effect is not executed and a variation pattern in which winnings and losses are notified by the SPSP reach effect is selected. has been done. In response to such a fluctuation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46(C), the first reach symbol lighting effect can be performed depending on the reach formation, but the second reach symbol light emission effect cannot be executed. It is. In addition, in this embodiment, during the first reach symbol light emission performance, the SPSP development performance is started with the end of the reach notification. Further, after the end of the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting effect, the SPSP development effect ends, and in conjunction with this, the SPSP ready-to-reach effect is started.

Figure 46 (D) shows the flow of the performance during the reach performance when the N reach performance is not executed and a variation pattern in which the SP reach performance develops into the SPSP reach performance and a win or loss is announced is selected. It is written. In response to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 46(D), the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect can be executed, but the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect cannot be executed. In this embodiment, during the SPSP development performance when the SP ready-to-reach performance develops into the SPSP ready-to-reach performance, the second ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting performance is not executed in order to create a sense of unity between the SP ready-to-reach performance and the SPSP ready-to-reach performance. In addition, in this embodiment, when the N reach performance, which has a lower reliability than the SP reach performance, develops into the SPSP reach performance, there is not much sense of unity among these reach performances. Therefore, in order to emphasize that when the N reach effect develops into the SPSP reach effect, the second reach symbol light emission effect can be executed during the SPSP development effect (Figure 47 (C) reference). In addition, in this embodiment, the first reach symbol light-emitting effect is executed at the same timing as in the case of corresponding to a variation pattern in which a win or loss is announced in the SP reach effect (that is, it does not develop into the SPSP reach effect) (Fig. 46 ( See B).

FIG. 47(A) shows a case where a variation pattern is selected in which winnings and losses are announced after the N reach effect develops into the SP reach effect (that is, the SP reach effect does not evolve into the SPSP reach effect or the special effect). The flow of the performance during the reach performance is described. In response to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 47(A), the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is executed in response to the establishment of a ready-to-win. The second ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting performance, for example, starts at the end of the SP development performance and ends by the end of the SP development performance. Note that the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance may be started with the start of the SP development performance, or may be ended with the end of the SP development performance.

FIG. 47(B) shows the flow of performance when a variation pattern is selected in which the N reach performance develops into the SP reach performance, which further develops into a special performance and wins and losses are announced. In addition, FIG. 47(D) shows the flow of the performance when a variation pattern is selected in which the N reach performance develops into the SP reach performance, which further develops into the SPSP reach performance, and wins and losses are announced. . In response to these fluctuation patterns, as illustrated in FIGS. 47(B) and (D), the first reach symbol lighting effect and the second reach symbol lighting effect are executed at the same timing as in FIG. 47(A). be done. In addition, in the case of FIG. 47(D) as well as the case of FIG. 46(D), the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is not executed during the SPSP development effect when the SP ready-to-reach effect develops into the SPSP ready-to-reach effect. This creates a sense of unity between the SP reach performance and the SPSP reach performance.

FIG. 47(C) shows the flow of performance when a variation pattern is selected in which the N reach performance evolves into the SPSP reach performance and wins and losses are announced. In response to such a variation pattern, as illustrated in FIG. 47(C), the first ready-to-win symbol light emission effect is executed at the same timing as in FIG. 47(A). The second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance is started, for example, during the SPSP development performance, and ends before the SPSP development performance ends. Note that the second ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting performance may be started with the start of the SPSP development performance, or may be ended with the end of the SPSP development performance.

In this embodiment, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect can be executed even when the N-ready-to-reach effect develops into either the SP ready-to-reach effect or the SPSP ready-to-reach effect (see FIG. 47). In addition, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance cannot be executed in any case where the SP ready-to-win performance develops into a special performance or an SPSP ready-to-reach performance.

In addition, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance may be started with the start of the SP development performance, or the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance may be started with the end of the SP development performance. Further, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect may be executed during the SP ready-to-win effect or during the SPSP ready-to-reach effect. Further, the second ready-to-win symbol lighting performance may be executed during the SPSP development performance when the SP ready-to-win performance develops into the SPSP ready-to-reach performance.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 51, an example of the ready-to-reach light emission effect in the normal gaming state will be described. FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the ready-to-reach light emission performance in the normal gaming state. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect in the normal gaming state. FIGS. 50 and 51 are explanatory diagrams for explaining an example of the flow after the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance in the normal gaming state.

As illustrated in FIGS. 48(A) and 48(B), in this example, a reach is achieved with the "1" symbol. In addition, FIG. 48(A) illustrates the state when the non-reach light emission performance due to the temporary stop of the left symbol is completed. Moreover, FIG. 48(B) illustrates the situation when a reach is established by the temporary stop of the right symbol, and the non-reach light emission effect is completed due to the temporary stop of the right symbol.

As illustrated in FIG. 48(C), for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after the non-reach lighting effect for the right symbol ends, the first reach symbol lighting effect and the reach line Performance and reach notification are started. FIG. 48(C) exemplifies how the entire left symbol and right symbol (both in the character presence mode) are illuminated by the effect image 80 related to the first reach symbol luminescence effect. In addition, the effect sound related to the reach notification (for example, the “cha” part of the voice “chance”) is output from the speaker 24. At the same time, a reach line image 81 is superimposed and displayed in front of the effect image 80 from the center of the left symbol to the center of the right symbol. As illustrated in FIG. 48(C), the effect image 80 is larger than the reach line image 81 at the start of the reach light emission effect. In this example, as the reach line image 81, for example, the words "Chance" are faintly floating. The reach notification and reach line performance suggest that it is highly reliable. In addition, in the example of FIG. 48(C), the medium symbol and the small symbol 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. It should be noted that the image related to the reach light emission effect is displayed on the front side of the medium pattern and on the back side of the small pattern 56. In addition, the small pattern 56 may be displayed in the same ready mode as the decorative pattern 55 when the ready-to-win pattern is established.

FIG. 48(D) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 48(C). As illustrated in FIG. 48(D), the entire left and right symbols continue to emit light due to the effect image 80. Further, a moving image is displayed in which the reach line image 81 extends in front of the effect image 80 from the left end of the screen (or the left end of the left symbol) to the right end of the screen (or the right end of the right symbol). In this example, as the reach line image 81, for example, the words "chance" are clearly displayed. In addition, the effect sound related to the reach notification (for example, the “chance” part of the audio “chance”) is output from the speaker 24. The reach notification ends with the output of this performance sound.

In the example of FIG. 48(D), the low-speed fluctuation of the medium symbol is started by starting the N reach effect. In this example, the medium symbol continues to fluctuate at a low speed until after the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting effect ends. The medium symbol during the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting effect is displayed in a superimposed manner behind the effect image 80 and the ready-to-reach line image 81. For this reason, some parts are hidden by these images and cannot be seen. Although the effect image 80 and the reach line image 81 cover the middle symbol, the middle symbol does not appear to be emitting light. In addition, the medium pattern may be superimposed and displayed on the near side of the effect image 80 and the reach line image 81 during the first reach symbol light emission effect.

In this embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 48(D) to (G), the medium symbol during the first reach symbol light-emitting performance is displayed when the first reach symbol light-emitting performance is not executed (for example, during the N reach symbol light-emitting performance). ). Specifically, for example, a mode that looks dark or a mode that has weak contrast may be used. In addition, it is not necessary to change the mode of the middle symbol during the first reach symbol light emission performance.

FIG. 48(E) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 48(D). As illustrated in FIG. 48(E), the entire left and right symbols continue to emit light due to the effect image 80. In addition, a moving image that becomes thinner and smaller as light converges is displayed as a reach line image 81 extending from the left end of the screen (or the left end of the left symbol) to the right end of the screen (or the right end of the right symbol). In this example, the word "chance" included in the reach line image 81 has already been deleted. For this reason, by reducing the reach line image 81, the mode changes from an aspect that suggests the reliability of a jackpot to an aspect that does not suggest it.

FIG. 48(F) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 48(E). As illustrated in FIG. 48(F), although the effect image 80 is displayed superimposed on the left and right symbols, the character image 552 of the left and right symbols is starting to look slightly transparent. . Further, the number image 552 of the left symbol and the right symbol is displayed in a superimposed manner on the front side of the effect image 80. Thereby, it can be recognized which decorative pattern 55 was used to achieve a reach during the first reach symbol light emission performance. In the example of FIG. 48(F), as the reach line image 81, a moving image is displayed that becomes narrower so that the light extending from the left edge of the screen (or the left edge of the left symbol) to the right edge of the screen (or the right edge of the right symbol) converges. Ru. The reach line image 81 continues to converge and disappear during the first reach symbol light emitting performance. This ends the reach line performance.

FIG. 48(G) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 48(F). As illustrated in FIG. 48(G), the character images 552 of the left and right symbols are more transparent than in the case of FIG. 48(F). The number image 552 of the left symbol and the right symbol continues to be displayed in a superimposed manner in front of the effect image 80. Note that the display positions of these decorative patterns 55 are moved so that the interval between the left pattern and the right pattern is widened. Immediately after such a state occurs, the effect image 80 is suddenly erased. As a result, the first ready-to-reach symbol light emitting performance ends. When the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting effect is completed, it becomes visible that the middle symbol is fluctuating at a low speed in front of the left symbol and the right symbol (see FIG. 48(H)). The gap between the left and right symbols may widen with the start of the first reach symbol lighting effect (or reach line effect), or the end of the first reach symbol light emission effect (or reach line effect). It may be accompanied by

FIG. 48(H) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 48(G). As illustrated in FIG. 48(H), with the end of the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting performance, a character image 552 is created in a predetermined manner, although the character itself is the same, but the character image 552 is in a different form from before the start to the end of the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting production. is displayed for a display time (for example, 1 second). When this display time has elapsed, as illustrated in FIG. 48(I), the character image 552 returns to the same state as before the start of the first ready-to-reach symbol light emitting effect (for example, see FIG. 48(B)). Such a change in the character image 552 further emphasizes that reach has been achieved. Note that the character image 552 does not need to be changed upon completion of the first ready-to-reach symbol light emitting effect.

Following FIG. 48 (I), in the case of a variable pattern that notifies a jackpot with N reach effect (that is, corresponding to variable pattern OP1), for example, the effects after the pattern alignment effect with the "1" symbol alignment are executed. A winning notification will be made. Since the specific example of the winning notification has been described above, the explanation here will be omitted. In the case of a variation pattern in which a loss is reported in the N reach performance, the main stop is made after a temporary stop when the reach is lost (see FIGS. 51 (a) and (b)). While the reach-losing eye is being displayed, none of the non-reaching light-emitting effect, reaching light-emitting effect, winning light-emitting effect, and chance eye-emitting effect are executed. In the case of a variation pattern that develops from N reach effect to SP reach effect (or SPSP reach effect), the middle symbol starts to fluctuate at high speed, as illustrated in FIG. 49(J).

Following Fig. 49 (J), in the case of a variation pattern that develops from N reach effect to SP reach effect, the middle symbol is hidden and the SP development effect is started as illustrated in Fig. 49 (K). Ru. When the SP development effect starts, the decorative pattern 55 changes from a character-present mode to a character-free mode. As illustrated in FIG. 49(L), for example, the second reach symbol light-emitting effect is executed at the end of this SP development effect. FIG. 49(L) exemplifies how the left and right symbols (both in characterless mode) are shimmering from the upper left to the lower right by the effect image 82 related to the second ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting effect. In this embodiment, the left and right symbols move to the upper left and right ends of the liquid crystal screen 5, respectively, during the SP development performance. For example, during the second reach symbol light emission performance, it is executed when the movement between the left symbol and the right symbol is completed. In addition, in the example of FIG. 49(K), the medium symbol and the small symbol 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed. It should be noted that during the second ready-to-reach symbol light emission performance, the small symbol 56 may be displayed in the same ready-to-reach mode as the decorative symbol 55.

As illustrated in FIG. 49(M), when the SP development performance ends after the end of the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, the SP ready-to-reach performance starts. For example, during the SP reach performance, as illustrated in FIG. 49(O), a chance up that suggests high reliability may be executed. In this example, if the chance up is not executed, character A closes its eyes and mouth (default mode of SP reach effect, see FIG. 49(N)). When the chance up is executed, character A has its eyes and mouth open (see FIG. 49(O)). Note that even if this chance up is executed, there is a possibility that the player loses (note that when the chance up is executed, it may always be a jackpot). The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment does not have a light emitting pattern for increasing the chance, and even when there is a chance increasing, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in the default light emitting pattern. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize that the chance up is being executed from any presentation means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, regarding the chance up, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond (are not interlocked).

As illustrated in FIG. 49(P), thereafter, in the middle of the SP reach performance, a performance is performed in which effect images imitating the performance button 26 are combined from the left and right directions and from the bottom. This performance is a performance that is executed immediately before the operation promotion performance, and is a performance that encourages execution of the operation promotion performance. Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 50(Q), an operation promotion effect is executed. This operation promotion performance may be in the same manner as the operation promotion performance during the final performance, or may be in a different manner. Note that at the start of the validity period, an image simulating the effect button 26 in detail and a white effect image superimposed on the near side of this image may be displayed as the operation promotion image 65. For example, with this effect image, an image that closely imitates the effect button 26 appears to shine. Then, when this effect image is erased after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds), an image that closely resembles the effect button 26 may become clearly visible. In addition, in the operation promotion performance, an image with no operation and an image with operation may be alternately displayed at the same position from the start to the end of the validity period as an image that closely resembles the performance button 26. . The no-operation image is a performance image that imitates the performance button 26 in an unoperated state. Further, the operated image is an image that imitates the effect button 26 in an operated state (that is, in a pressed state). By alternately displaying such an image in a non-operated state and an image in an operated state, it is shown that the effect button 26 is being operated, and the player is prompted to operate the button.

In this embodiment, in response to an operation (or in response to the end of a predetermined validity period), a cut-in image suggesting reliability is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) of an image related to a reach effect (for example, a character There are cases where the decorative pattern 55 is displayed superimposed on the image attempting to destroy the decorative pattern 55, and cases where a pattern alignment effect is executed (see FIGS. 50(S) and 50(T)). When a cut-in image (for example, the image displayed at the right end of FIG. 50(S) that says "I can't lose!") is displayed, the SP reach effect is executed until the final stage. On the other hand, when the symbol matching effect is executed, the SP ready-to-win effect is not executed until the final stage, and the hit notification is made in the middle of the SP ready-to-win effect. Note that the details of the winning notification have been described above and will therefore be omitted. In addition, during performances related to operation promotion performances, including promotion performances and performances that display cut-in images, the board lamp 25 is illuminated with a light emission pattern for these performances (that is, a light emission pattern different from the light emission pattern for other performances). and/or the frame lamp 37 emits light. Therefore, in this respect, this is different from the case of chance up, in which the liquid crystal screen 5 and the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond to each other (they are not interlocked).

As illustrated in FIG. 50(U), thereafter, at the end of the SP reach effect, an effect image that looks like something is going to happen is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. This performance is a performance that is performed only immediately before the final performance, and is a performance that stimulates the execution of the final performance. Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 50(V), a final performance is executed. This deciding performance may be performed in the same manner as the operation promotion performance in the middle of the SP reach performance, or may be executed in a different manner (for example, the manner illustrated in FIGS. 50(V) and (W)) in the case of high reliability. You can. Note that at the start of the validity period, an image simulating the effect button 26 in detail and a white effect image superimposed on the near side of this image may be displayed as the operation promotion image 65. For example, with this effect image, an image that closely imitates the effect button 26 appears to shine. Then, when this effect image is erased after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds), an image that closely resembles the effect button 26 may become clearly visible.

In the case of a variable pattern that notifies you of a jackpot with SP reach performance, for example, depending on the operation (or depending on the end of a predetermined validity period), for example, the performance after the pattern matching performance with "1" pattern matching is executed. A winning notification will be made. Since the specific example of the winning notification has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here. In the case of a variation pattern that notifies you of a loss or a win in the SP reach performance, and in the case of a variation pattern that develops from an SP reach performance to an SPSP reach performance or a special performance, the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops at the position of the reach loss (Fig. 50 (X) ) and FIG. 51(Y)). Note that, at this point, it has not yet been determined that the decorative pattern 55 will actually stop in a loss mode (that is, it is a temporary loss). In terms of the size positioning in Figure 18, the medium symbol during the temporary stop when reaching the target loses the reach, from "medium", which is smaller than "large" but larger, to "medium", which is approximately the same size as during the pre-reach performance. The size changes.

In the present embodiment, in the case of a loss notification when the player loses the reach, the light emission effect during the non-reach is not executed. In this respect, it is different from the case where a reach is not established even if the loss notification is the same, a light emission effect can be executed during a non-reach. Further, in the present embodiment, while the reach-missing eye is displayed, the reach-to-win light-emitting effect, the winning-eye light-emitting effect, and the chance eye-emitting effect are not executed.

In the case of a variation pattern that notifies a loss or a win without developing into an SPSP reach effect or special effect, the model name display as illustrated in FIG. 51 (Z) following FIG. 2 seconds). The model name display is, for example, an effect of darkening the liquid crystal screen 5 and displaying the characters "Butt Sumo" which is the model name of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, after the model name is displayed, a loss is basically notified. Therefore, basically (specifically, for example, in the case of a variation pattern that notifies you of a loss without developing into an SPSP reach effect or a special effect), the background image returns to the normal background image, and the same reach loss as immediately before the model name is displayed. The decorative pattern 55 with a character comes to a temporary stop when the eyes are combined, and then comes to a permanent stop (flow from (Z) to (a) to (b) in FIG. 51). While the reach-losing eye is displayed, none of the non-reach light-emitting effect, reach-to-reach light emitting effect, winning light-emitting effect, and chance eye light-emitting effect are executed.

In addition, in a certain percentage (for example, about 30% of jackpots announced by SP reach effect), the model name display ends after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) after the model name display is executed and the jackpot is announced. be notified. In this case, for example, following the display of the model name, a winning notification is performed in which the performance after the pattern alignment effect with “1” pattern alignment (or “7” pattern alignment instead of “1” pattern alignment) is executed. . Since the specific example of the winning notification has been described above, the explanation here will be omitted.

In the case of a variation pattern that develops into a special effect, the effects from FIG. 31(C) onward will be executed following FIG. 51(Y) (the explanation here will be omitted). In the case of a variation pattern that develops into an SPSP reach performance, the SPSP development performance as illustrated in FIG. 51(D) is executed following FIG. 51(Y). In the case of such a flow, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance is not executed during the SPSP development performance. In the SPSP reach performance that follows the SPSP development performance, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 51 (e), characters are displayed in a buttocks wrestling match. Then, a final performance may be executed at the final stage (see FIG. 51(f)). The form of the decisive effect may be the same as the operation promotion effect in the middle of the SP reach effect, or may be a form in which an image closely resembling the effect button 26 that always stands out in the case of high reliability or regardless of the reliability is displayed. .

In the case of a variable pattern that notifies you of a loss in the SPSP reach performance, the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops at the position of a loss in the reach depending on the operation (or in accordance with the end of a predetermined validity period) (see FIG. 51(G)). In terms of the size positioning in FIG. 18, the medium symbol during the temporary stop when the reach loses is "medium", which is approximately the same size as during the pre-reach performance. In the case of a loss, after the model name is displayed following FIG. 51 (G), the decorative pattern 55 that has changed to the character mode is stopped, and the loss is confirmed (FIGS. 51 (Z), (A), and (b)). While the reach-losing eye is displayed, none of the non-reach light-emitting effect, reach-to-reach light emitting effect, winning light-emitting effect, and chance eye light-emitting effect are executed.

On the other hand, in the case of a variable pattern that notifies you of a hit in the SPSP reach performance, depending on the operation (or depending on the end of the predetermined validity period), for example, the performance after the pattern matching performance with "1" pattern matching is executed. A winning notification will be made. In addition, in the case of a variable pattern that notifies you of a win in the SPSP reach effect, the model name is displayed following FIGS. After that, a winning notification may be performed in which a performance after the symbol matching performance is executed (flow of FIG. 51 (g) → (Z) → (c)). Since the specific example of the winning notification has been described above, the explanation here will be omitted. Note that if the model name display is executed after the SPSP reach performance, it may always be a loss. That is, the model name display may be a performance that suggests a possibility of a loss when executed after the SP SP ready-to-win performance, and a performance that suggests a definite loss when executed after the SPSP ready-to-win performance.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, the ready-to-reach light emission effect in the variable probability gaming state will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 52, the execution timing of the ready-to-reach light emission effect in the variable probability gaming state will be explained. In this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 52, the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect is executed as the ready-to-reach light-emitting effect, and the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect and the ready-to-reach line effect are not executed. The first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance is executed in response to the establishment of a ready-to-win symbol as in the normal gaming state. Also, the reach notification is executed in conjunction with the start of the first reach symbol light-emitting effect, as in the normal gaming state. As illustrated in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, the ready-to-reach notification ends during the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting effect, and the battle start effect is accordingly started. Note that the flow of performance during win notification and loss notification has been described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36, so the description will be omitted in FIG. 52.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, an example of the ready-to-reach light emission effect in the variable probability gaming state will be described. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect in the variable probability gaming state. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the flow after the end of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance in the variable probability gaming state.

As illustrated in FIGS. 53(A) and 53(B), in this example, the reach is established with the "3" symbol. In addition, FIG. 53(A) illustrates a state in which the non-reaching light emission effect accompanying the temporary stop of the left symbol is completed, and the reach promotion effect is executed to encourage the temporary stop of 3 symbols as the right symbol. . In the reach promotion effect, for example, an effect image is displayed in which the lower part of the right symbol appears to emit light due to friction (see FIG. 53(A)). After the reach promotion effect, there are cases where the reach is established and cases where the reach is not established. FIG. 53(B) exemplifies the situation when a reach is established by temporarily stopping the right symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the case of the normal game state, in the probability variable game state, the non-ready light emission performance accompanying the temporary stop of the right symbol is not executed (see FIG. 45).

As illustrated in FIG. 53(C), for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed after the right symbol temporarily stops, the first reach symbol lighting effect and the reach notification are started. . FIG. 53(C) exemplifies how the left symbol and the right symbol are entirely emitted by the effect image 80 related to the first ready-to-reach symbol light emitting effect. In addition, the speaker 24 outputs a production sound related to reach notification (for example, a sound saying "reach"). The reach notification ends when the output of this production sound ends. In addition, in the example of FIG. 53(C), the middle pattern is hidden. Moreover, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate at high speed. In this example, the small pattern 56 continues to fluctuate at high speed until the decorative pattern 55 comes to a final stop. In addition, the small pattern 56 may be displayed in the same ready mode as the decorative pattern 55 when the ready-to-win pattern is established.

FIG. 53(D) illustrates the situation immediately after FIG. 53(C). As illustrated in FIG. 53(D), the left pattern and the right pattern become smaller while continuing to emit light as a whole due to the effect image 80. Along with this, the left symbol moves to the left edge of the screen, and the right symbol moves to the right edge of the screen. Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 53(E), the left and right symbols complete their movement to both ends of the screen while continuing to emit light as a whole due to the effect image 80, and no longer become smaller. FIG. 53(E) illustrates how the battle start effect is started during the first reach symbol light emission effect. During the battle start performance, the effect image 80 is erased in a popping manner, thereby ending the first reach symbol light emission performance. In addition, in the first reach symbol light-emitting performance in the variable probability game state, until the end, the decorative symbol 55 is slightly visible through the effect image 80, but the number image 552 is completely visible until the end. do not become. In this point, it is different from the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance in the normal gaming state in which the number image 552 becomes visible during the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance (see FIG. 48(F)).

As illustrated in FIGS. 53(F) and (G), when the battle start effect ends, the battle effect starts. For example, during a battle performance, as illustrated in FIG. 53(F), a chance increase indicating high reliability may be performed. In this example, if the chance up is not executed, there is no flag next to the character who engages in butt wrestling (default mode of battle performance, see FIG. 53(G)). When the chance up is executed, a flag is raised next to the character who engages in buttocks wrestling (see FIG. 53(F)). Note that even if this chance up is executed, there is a possibility that the player loses (note that when the chance up is executed, it may always be a jackpot). The gaming machine 1 in this embodiment does not have a light emitting pattern for increasing the chance, and even when there is a chance increasing, the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light in the default light emitting pattern. Therefore, it is impossible to recognize that the chance up is being executed from any presentation means other than the liquid crystal screen 5. That is, regarding the chance up, the liquid crystal screen 5 and the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 do not correspond (are not interlocked).

Following FIG. 53(F) or (G), as illustrated in FIG. 54(H), an image prompting the player to perform an operation is displayed at the final stage of the battle performance. This performance is a performance that is performed only immediately before the final performance, and is a performance that encourages execution of the final performance. Subsequently, as illustrated in FIGS. 54(I) and (J), a final performance is executed. In this decisive performance, if the character wins in the battle performance, the character whose victory performance will be executed is superimposed on the entire screen behind the operation promotion image 65 and the valid period image 651. In this respect, it is different from the operation promotion performance in the normal gaming state (for example, the modes illustrated in FIGS. 50(Q) and (R)) (note that the same mode may be used). As illustrated in FIGS. 54(I) and (J), as the operation promotion image 65, a white effect image is displayed at the start of the validity period, and this effect image is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). When erased, an image replicating the protruding effect button 26 in detail may become clearly visible.

In the case of a fluctuating jackpot pattern, for example, depending on the operation (or depending on the end of a predetermined validity period), for example, a hit notification in which the performance after the pattern alignment effect with "3" symbols aligned is executed. (See FIG. 54(K)). Since the specific example of the winning notification has been described above, the explanation here will be omitted. In the case of a loss variation pattern, the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops in a manner indicating a loss (see FIG. 54(L)). In addition, in this embodiment, in the variable probability game state, the combination of the decorative pattern 55 in the ready-to-win state and the medium symbol indicating a number that is obtained by adding (or subtracting) 2 to the number indicated by the decorative symbol 55 in the ready-to-reach state will result in a loss. This is the mode shown. In the case of a loss notification when the reach loses, the light emission effect during non-reach is not executed. In this respect, the variable probability gaming state is different from the normal gaming state in that even if the loss notification is the same, if the reach is not established, the non-reaching light emission effect can be executed. It should be noted that while the reach-missing eye is displayed, the reach-to-win light-emitting effect, the winning light-emitting effect, and the chance eye-emitting effect are not executed. In addition, in terms of the size positioning in FIG. 18, the medium symbol during the temporary stop in the reach losing eye is "medium", which is approximately the same size as during the pre-reach performance.

Subsequently, the model name is displayed as exemplified in FIG. 54(M) for a predetermined execution time (for example, 2 seconds). In this embodiment, the model name display in the variable probability gaming state is slightly different from that in the normal gaming state. For example, the liquid crystal screen 5 is darkened and the characters ``Butt Sumo'', which is the model name of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, and a main character (for example, character A) are displayed. Note that the mode of displaying the model name may be the same regardless of the gaming state. In this embodiment, a loss is always notified after the model name is displayed in the variable probability gaming state. For this reason, the model name display in the variable probability gaming state functions as an effect that suggests a loss. With the end of the model name display, a background image for probability variation is displayed, and the decorative pattern 55 without a character temporarily stops with the same combination of reach-losing eyes as immediately before displaying the model name, and then comes to a permanent stop (Fig. 54 (See (N) and (O)). Note that the jackpot may be notified via the model name display. In this case, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) after the model name is displayed, for example, a performance after the pattern alignment effect with “3” pattern alignment (or “7” pattern alignment instead of “3” pattern alignment) A winning notification may be made when the is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the total number of times of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, and the winning light-emitting performance in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 55 is a table for explaining the total number of times of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, and the winning light-emitting performance in the normal gaming state. Note that FIG. 55 shows the case where the re-lottery effect is not performed during the winning notification. In FIG. 55, the performance name is written below the total number of times of the above-mentioned performance corresponding to the decorative pattern 55 that is temporarily stopped during the reach light emission performance and the winning light emission performance. Specifically, it will be explained with reference to the column "Fluctuation pattern corresponding to reach establishment → N reach → jackpot". For example, in a variable pattern that announces a hit with N reach effect like this, the total number of left symbols is 3 times, the total number of right symbols is also 3 times, and the total number of middle symbols is 2 times. . For the left symbol, a first reach symbol light emitting effect, a first light emitting effect, and a second light emitting effect are executed. Similarly, the first ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting effect, the first light-emitting effect, and the second light-emitting effect are executed for the right symbol. For the middle symbol, a first light emitting effect and a second light emitting effect are performed.

As illustrated in FIG. 55, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the total number of times for the middle symbol is smaller than for the left symbol (or right symbol) no matter which variation pattern is used. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 55, in this embodiment, the total number of left symbols and right symbols is the same regardless of the variation pattern, and the type of performance executed is also the same. . Regarding the second reach symbol light emitting performance, there are executable variation patterns and unexecutable variation patterns. Therefore, the total number of times for the left symbol and the right symbol may differ depending on the type of variation pattern. The reach light emitting effect is not executed for medium symbols. Regarding the winning light emitting effect, it is possible to perform it in the case of a jackpot regardless of the game state, but it is not possible to perform it in the case of a loss. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot, the light emitting effect is performed twice regardless of the variation pattern, and in the case of a loss, the light emitting effect is not executed (ie, 0 times).

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the total number of times of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, and the winning light-emitting performance in the variable probability gaming state will be explained. FIG. 56 is a table for explaining the total number of times of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance, and the winning light-emitting performance in the probability variable gaming state. In addition, in FIG. 56, the performance name is written below the total number of times of the above-mentioned performance corresponding to the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped during the reach light emission performance and the winning light emission performance. Also, like FIG. 55, FIG. 56 shows a case where the re-lottery effect is not performed during the winning notification. Specifically, it will be explained with reference to the column "Reach establishment → Battle performance → Victory performance → Fluctuation pattern corresponding to jackpot". For example, in such a variation pattern for notifying a hit, the total number of times for the left symbol is 3, the total number of times for the right symbol is also 3, and the total number of times for the middle symbol is 2. For the left symbol (and the right symbol), a first reach symbol light emitting effect, a first light emitting effect, and a second light emitting effect are executed. For the middle symbol, a first light emitting effect and a second light emitting effect are performed.

As illustrated in FIG. 56, in this embodiment, in the variable probability game state as well as in the normal game state, the total number of times for the middle symbol is higher than for the left symbol (or right symbol) in any variation pattern. few. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 56, in this embodiment, the total number of left symbols and right symbols is the same regardless of the variation pattern, and the types of effects performed are also the same. . For the medium symbol, the winning effect is executed twice in the variable pattern of the jackpot. Further, in the case of a variable pattern in which a losing effect is executed in a jackpot and a variable pattern in which a draw effect is lost, the light emitting effect is not executed (ie, 0 times).

In both cases of FIGS. 55 and 56, if the flow is such that the second first light emission effect is performed after the re-lottery effect is performed during the winning notification (see FIG. 27), the fluctuation pattern of each jackpot Correspondingly, the total number of times increases by one for the second first light emission effect.

Comparing FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, in this embodiment, the first reach symbol light emitting effect, the second reach symbol light emitting effect, and the winning light emitting effect are relatively different in the case of the normal game state than in the case of the variable probability game state. It can be executed many times. In addition, regarding each of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol, the total number of times of the first reach symbol lighting effect, the second reach symbol lighting effect, and the winning light emission effect may be the same regardless of the gaming state, or may be the same in the normal gaming state. In the case of , the number may be smaller than in the case of the variable probability gaming state.

As described above, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect, and the winning light-emitting effect can be executed. In addition, in any game state (or in a predetermined game state), the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance and the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance cannot be performed, but the configuration may be such that the winning light-emitting performance can be performed. As a result, any of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol will be played twice (first light emitting performance and second light emitting performance) in the case of a jackpot, and zero times in the case of a loss. That is, regardless of whether it is a jackpot or not, the total number of times of the above performance (specifically, the number of times only the winning light emission performance) is the same for the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. In addition, in such a configuration, the reach line effect may or may not be executable.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, the first reach symbol lighting effect, the second reach symbol lighting effect, the hit lighting effect, and the non-reach lighting effect during one special symbol variable display (see Figures 44 and 55). The total number of times is the same for the left and right symbols, and is the least for the middle symbol. In the variable probability game state, the total number of times the above performance is performed during one variable display of special symbols increases in the order of left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol (see FIGS. 45 and 56). In addition, regarding each of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the total number of performances described above may be the same regardless of the gaming state.

In this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, specific symbols indicating content other than numbers may be displayed as decorative symbols. The specific symbols are, for example, pseudo-continuation symbols that temporarily stop to notify that a pseudo-continuation will be executed, development symbols that temporarily stop to notify the development destination performance (for example, SP reach performance), etc. Corresponding to a specific symbol, a non-reach light emitting effect, a reach emitting effect, and a winning light emitting effect may not be executed. Therefore, the total number of times the above performance of the specific symbol is performed is 0 regardless of the gaming state. In addition, in other embodiments, the above-mentioned effect may be executed in response to a specific symbol regardless of the gaming state, or may be executed in response to a specific symbol in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state). The above effect may be executed. Further, while the above-mentioned effect is executed for a predetermined specific symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol), the above-mentioned effect may not be executed for other specific symbols (for example, a developed symbol).

In this embodiment, during one variable display of special symbols, the first reach symbol light emitting performance, the second reach symbol light emitting performance, and the hit light emitting performance correspond to the decorative symbol 55 that is temporarily stopped when a reach is established. May be executed. On the other hand, during the above-mentioned variable display, there is no case where the above-mentioned light emitting effect is executed corresponding to the decorative pattern 55 that is not temporarily stopped when a ready-to-win is established. For this reason, the decorative pattern 55 that is temporarily stopped when a ready-to-win is established has a higher execution rate of the light emitting effect than the decorative symbol 55 that is not temporarily stopped when a ready-to-win is established.

Also, regarding the total number of times the first reach symbol light-emitting performance and the second reach symbol light-emission performance are performed, the number of executions during one special symbol variable display is higher in the normal gaming state than in the variable probability gaming state. many. Note that the total number of times of the first ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance and the second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting performance may be the same regardless of the gaming state, or may be smaller in the normal gaming state than in the variable probability gaming state.

As illustrated in FIGS. 44, 45, 55, and 56, the lighting effect for each variation pattern (in this paragraph, the lighting effect during non-reach, the first reach symbol emission effect, the second reach symbol emission effect, the second reach symbol emission effect, The total number of times (1 light emission effect, 2nd light emission effect) differs depending on the variation pattern. For example, in the case of a fluctuating pattern that notifies you of a hit with an N reach effect where pseudo-connection cannot be executed, a non-reaching light emitting effect corresponding to the left symbol, a non-reaching light emitting effect corresponding to the right symbol, and the first reach symbol emitting light. There are five times: the performance, the first light emission performance, and the second light emission performance. Also, for example, in the case of a variable pattern in which a hit is announced with an SP reach effect developed from an N reach effect in which a pseudo link cannot be performed, or in the case of a variable pattern in which a hit is notified with an N reach effect in which a pseudo link is not possible, the light emission In addition to the performance, the second reach symbol light emission performance is executed, so the total number of times is six. In this example, the total number of light emission effects is the same in the two variation patterns up to the end of the N reach effect, and is different between the two variation patterns in the part after the end of the N reach effect. In this way, by partially varying the total number of light emitting effects depending on the variation pattern, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous. Note that the total number of light emission effects may be different for each variation pattern. In other words, when there are multiple variation patterns in which a predetermined performance can be executed, the total number of times is different for each variation pattern in the portion up to the end of the predetermined performance (for example, N reach performance) and the portion after the end of the predetermined performance. You can.

Note that an effect image 80 of a color indicating the level of reliability may be displayed by the first reach symbol light emitting effect. Further, an effect image 82 of a color indicating the level of reliability may be displayed by the second ready-to-reach symbol light-emitting effect. For example, the colors of the effect images 80 and 82 may be determined by random number lottery based on the result of special symbol determination by the production control unit 130, or may be uniquely determined according to the type of reach production, It may be determined uniquely depending on the type of decorative pattern 55 forming the reach.

(Chance eye lighting effect)
Next, the chance eye light emission effect when the chance eye stops will be explained. Here, the chance item does not itself indicate a jackpot, but it is a specific symbol that suggests the possibility of a jackpot in the subsequent fluctuations of the current special symbol fluctuation, or in the current fluctuation of the special symbol. It is a decorative pattern (or a combination of specific decorative patterns). Opportunity items that indicate the possibility of a jackpot in subsequent fluctuations are called "pre-reading chance items." The look-ahead chance is a performance that is performed based on the result of a preliminary determination, and is a performance that involves variations in one or more special symbols.

In the present embodiment, decorative patterns are classified into a plurality of types by color, which indicates the level of reliability. Specifically, the decorative patterns include blue patterns (even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8") that are blue, and green designs ("1", "5", and "8") that are green. They are classified into ``9'' (odd number symbols) and red symbols (``3'' and ``7'' symbols). A combination of three decorative patterns of the same classification constitutes a look-ahead chance. A look-ahead chance eye consisting of a blue symbol is called a ``blue chance eye'', a look-ahead chance eye consisting of a green symbol a ``green chance eye'', and a look-ahead chance eye consisting of a red symbol a ``red chance eye''. For example, the combination of decorative patterns ``442'' and ``664'' from the left is a blue chance. Further, depending on the classification of each decorative pattern constituting the look-ahead chance, the degree of confidence that a jackpot will be achieved in subsequent changes in special symbols differs. Specifically, the reliability increases in the order of blue chance, green chance, and red chance. Furthermore, when the look-ahead chance eye is displayed, a look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect is performed for each decorative pattern 55.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59, a look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect in the normal game state will be described.

FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of performance over variations of a plurality of special symbols when a look-ahead chance is displayed. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the effect following FIG. 58.

As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58(A), for example, when the right to determine the two first special symbols (reservation icons 51a and 51b) is reserved, the time t0 during the variation of the first special symbol , when a game ball wins in the first starting opening 11, the right to determine the first special symbol related to the winning is reserved (a "reservation icon 51c" is newly added). Here, the hold icons 51a, 51b, and 51c will be referred to as "Hold 1," "Hold 2," and "Hold 3," respectively. A preliminary determination is made when the game ball related to this reservation 3 wins. The rights subject to this preliminary determination are referred to as "pre-reading targets."

Next, at time t1, the variation of the first special symbol ends, the variation effect ends, and a loss is notified (FIG. 58(A)). Next, at time t2, the first special symbol determination related to reservation 1 is performed, and the three decorative symbols 55 start varying in response to the start of variation of the first special symbol (FIG. 58(B)). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the decorative pattern 55 (for example, the "4" pattern) temporarily stops in the left area (t3 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(C)). Thereafter, the decorative pattern 55 (for example, the "2" pattern) is temporarily stopped in the right area (t4 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(D)). Furthermore, after that, the decorative pattern 55 (for example, the "4" pattern) temporarily stops in the middle area (t5 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(E)). As a result, three decorative patterns 55 ("442") indicating a loss are displayed. The combination of these three decorative patterns 55 is a blue chance. Note that while the decorative patterns 55 temporarily stop in the left area, right area, and middle area in order, the three small patterns 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed.

When a look-ahead chance eye is displayed, a look-ahead chance eye light-up effect is performed. That is, after the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, at the timing when the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, or immediately before the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, the three decorative patterns 55 are A look-ahead chance eye light emission effect is performed (t6 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(F)). Specifically, an effect image 91 for emphasizing each pattern is added to each of the three decorative patterns 55 so that the three decorative patterns 55 emit light. The effect image 91 may be an image displayed around each decorative pattern 55, an image superimposed in front of each decorative pattern 55, or an image displayed behind each decorative pattern 55. It may be an image displayed on. The three decorative patterns 55 at this time are in a character mode in which a character is added to a numerical pattern, and are in a "medium" size mode. In addition, while the pre-read chance eye light emitting effect is performed for the three decorative patterns 55, each decorative pattern 55 may be displayed in a moment larger than each decorative pattern when the non-reach light emitting effect is performed. In this case, each decorative pattern 55 is displayed smaller than the decorative pattern 55 during the first light emitting effect in the winning light emitting effect described above. Further, each decorative pattern 55 in the look-ahead chance light-emission performance may be displayed larger than the decorative pattern during the second light-emission performance in the winning light-emission performance. It should be noted that the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed even during the look-ahead chance eye light-emission performance.

The effect image 91 differs depending on the type of decorative pattern 55 to be stopped. Specifically, when a blue chance (for example, "442") is displayed, a bluish effect image 91 is displayed. Further, when a green chance number (for example, "115") is displayed, a greenish effect image 91 is displayed. Furthermore, when a red chance (for example, "337") is displayed, a reddish effect image 91 is displayed. The effect image 91 used in the look-ahead chance flash effect is the effect image in the hit light effect (the effect image 61 used in the first light effect and the effect image 62 used in the second light effect), and the effect image 91 in the non-reach light effect. The image used is a different image from the image used for the reach light emission effect.

Further, when a pre-read chance number is displayed, a lamp lighting effect is performed in which the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 are made to emit light in a manner suggesting the pre-read chance number. The look ahead chance eye light emitting effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the lamp light emitting effect performed using the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 are linked. In this lamp lighting effect, the effect means capable of emitting light emits light in a color that indicates the level of reliability (specifically, the same color as the color of the look-ahead chance). Specifically, when a blue chance eye is displayed, a lamp light emitting effect in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit blue light is performed at the timing when a look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect related to the blue chance eye is performed. It will be done. Furthermore, when a green chance is displayed, a lamp light-emitting effect is performed in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emits green light at the timing when a pre-read chance light-emitting effect related to the green chance is performed. Further, when a red chance is displayed, a lamp light-emitting effect is performed in which the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emits red light at the timing when the pre-read chance eye light-emitting effect related to the red chance is performed.

That is, when a look-ahead chance number is displayed, a look-ahead chance eye light-emission effect and a lamp light-emission effect related to a look-ahead chance eye are performed in conjunction with each other.

After the look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect is executed, the variation of the first special symbol ends, and the three decorative symbols 55 come to a final stop (t7 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(G)). When the three decorative patterns 55 come to a final stop, the effect image 91 is not displayed and the look ahead chance eye light emitting effect has ended. The effect image 91 is displayed before the main stop of the decorative pattern 55, and the effect image 91 is not displayed when the main stop of the decorative pattern 55 occurs, so that it is possible to emphasize the look-ahead chance to the player, and the decoration at the main stop. The visibility of the pattern 55 can be prevented from being obstructed. When the pre-read chance eye light emitting effect ends, the lamp light emitting effect also ends. Note that even after the look-ahead chance eye light-emission effect ends, the corresponding lamp light-emission effect may be continued. That is, even when the three decorative symbols are stopped (when the first special symbol is stopped), the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 may continue to emit blue light. In this case, the lamp light emission performance related to the look-ahead chance may end at the start of the next variation. In addition, at the timing at which the three decorative patterns 55 come to a permanent stop (the timing at which the special symbols are stopped and displayed), the three small symbols 56 also come to a permanent stop.

Next, the first special symbol determination related to Pending 2 is performed, and the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and the three decorative symbols 55 also fluctuate (t8 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58(H)). Regarding Pending 2, similarly to the above, the left symbol stops (t9 in FIG. 57, FIG. 58 (I)), and furthermore, the right symbol stops (t10 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59 (J)).

Furthermore, after that, the middle symbol stops (t11 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59(K)). At this time, the three decorative patterns 55 may be numbered "155" in order from the left. The combination of these three decorative patterns 55 is a green chance.

After the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, at the timing when the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, or just before the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the middle area, there is a chance to read ahead for three decorative patterns 55. An eye light effect is performed (t12 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59(L)). Specifically, a greenish effect image 91 for emphasizing each pattern is added to each of the three decorative patterns 55 so that the three decorative patterns 55 emit green light. Further, in conjunction with this look-ahead chance eye light emitting performance, a lamp light emitting performance corresponding to the green chance eye is also performed. Specifically, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit green light in response to the green pre-read chance eye light emitting effect. It should be noted that the three small symbols 56 continue to fluctuate at high speed even during the pre-reading chance eye light emission performance related to the green chance eye.

Then, the variation of the first special symbol ends, and the three decorative symbols 55 come to a final stop (t13 in FIG. 57, FIG. 59(M)). Furthermore, at the timing when the three decorative patterns 55 come to a final stop, the three small symbols 56 also come to a final stop. When the three decorative patterns 55 come to a final stop, the effect image 91 is not displayed and the look ahead chance eye light emitting effect has ended. Furthermore, after that, the variation related to the reservation 3 (the variation related to the prefetch target) is started (t14 in FIG. 57, (N) in FIG. 59). If a jackpot is determined in the special symbol determination at the start of this variation, a jackpot will be notified in this variation. In this case, during the winning notification, the above-described winning light emitting effects (first light emitting effect, second light emitting effect) are performed.

In addition, the above-mentioned look-ahead chance eye light-up effect is executed when the result of the special symbol judgment is a loss and the loss variation pattern (HP1 to HP3) is selected, and when the reach variation pattern (RP1 to RP4) is selected. It is not executed in this case.

When a winning notification is performed in a change related to a pre-reading target, the period from the start (or end) of the winning light emitting effect (first light emitting effect and/or second light emitting effect) until the main stop of the decorative pattern 55 (decoration The period of swinging of the decorative pattern 55) is the period from the start (or end) of the look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect performed in the change before the change related to the look-ahead target until the main stop of the decorative pattern 55 (the period of swinging of the decorative pattern 55). period of time (for example, a period from time t6 to t7, a period from time t12 to t13). Note that the relationship between these swing periods may be reversed or may be the same. In other words, when a winning notification is made in a change related to the pre-reading target, the period from the start (or end) of the winning light emitting effect to the main stop of the decorative pattern 55 (the period of swinging of the decorative pattern 55) is related to the pre-reading target. It may be shorter than or the same as the period from the start (or end) of the look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect performed in the previous variation to the actual stop of the decorative pattern 55.

In addition, when a winning notification is performed in a change related to a pre-reading target, the execution time of the winning flash effect (first light emitting effect and/or second light emitting effect) is determined by the execution time for the change before the change related to the pre-reading target. The execution time of the look-ahead chance eye light effect is shorter than the execution time of the look-ahead chance eye light effect, whereas the reliability of the hit light effect (first light effect and/or second light effect) is the most reliable look-ahead chance eye light effect. The reliability is higher than the reliability (pre-reading chance eye lighting effect related to red chance eye). Note that the relationship between these execution periods may be reversed or may be the same. In other words, when a winning notification is given in a change related to a pre-read target, the execution time of the winning flash effect may be longer than the execution time of the pre-read chance eye light effect performed in the change before the change related to the pre-read target. However, it may be the same.

In addition, there are multiple aspects of the look-ahead chance eye light-up effect with different degrees of reliability (look-alike chance eye light-up effect for blue chance eyes, look-ahead chance eye light-up effect for green chance eyes, look-ahead chance eye light emission effect for red chance eyes). However, there may be only one aspect of the winning light emitting effect (the first light emitting effect and/or the second light emitting effect). Further, there are a plurality of aspects of the look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect with different degrees of reliability, and there may also be a plurality of aspects (with the same reliability) of the winning light emitting effect.

In addition, in the above-mentioned look-ahead chance eyes, the color of each decorative pattern constituting the look-ahead chance eye and the color associated with the look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect were assumed to correspond (same), but each decorative pattern is not classified by color. You can. In this case, the mode of the look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect may be changed depending on the color of the effect image added to each decorative pattern, and the reliability may be indicated by the color. For example, when the "2" symbol and the "4" symbol are white, if you want to display a "442" chance, you can display blue or green effect images around each decorative symbol. A green-tinged look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect may be performed.

In addition, the look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect is not limited to displaying an effect image around each decorative pattern, but the entire or part of the background image is colored in a predetermined color (blue, green, red, etc.) that indicates reliability. It may also be an aspect in which it is changed to .

In addition, in the above case, when the look-ahead chance is displayed, the decorative symbols in the left area, right area, and middle area stop in order, but the order in which the decorative symbols stop is not limited to this. Also, when the decorative symbols in the left area, right area, and middle area stop at the same time, the look-ahead chance eye may temporarily stop and the look-ahead chance eye light-up effect may be performed.

Furthermore, in the above description, the three decorative symbols 55 constitute a pre-read chance, but one or two decorative symbols 55 may constitute a pre-read chance. Furthermore, the look-ahead chance may be formed using not only numbers but also symbols with letters attached. Further, although in the above description the decorative symbols constituting the look-ahead chances are decorative patterns of the same classification, any decorative patterns may be used to display the look-ahead chances. In this case, regardless of the type of decorative pattern 55 to be stopped, when the pre-read chance eye light emitting effect (effect image 91) is executed, it becomes a pre-read chance eye.

Moreover, although the case where the pre-read chance number is displayed in the normal gaming state has been described above, the pre-read chance number may also be displayed in the variable probability gaming state and/or the time-saving gaming state.

As described above, even when the pre-read chance eye is displayed based on the result of the preliminary determination, the pre-read chance eye light-emitting effect is performed for the decorative pattern 55. Thereby, it is possible to raise the expectations of the players and improve their interest.

Next, we will explain the chance items that indicate the possibility of a jackpot in the current fluctuation of special symbols. A chance item that indicates the possibility of a jackpot in the current variation of special symbols is referred to as "the relevant chance item".

The chance is a combination of specific decorative patterns or an effect that temporarily stops a specific pattern (specific image) in one special pattern change. For example, the chance may be a specific combination of three numbered decorative patterns 55 (for example, "123", "456", etc.). Further, the chance may be an effect in which one specific symbol (specific image) is displayed. For example, the specific symbol (specific image) may be an image written with "NEXT" or "Continue" suggesting a pseudo-variation performance (pseudo-association).

Even when the chance eye is displayed, a light-emitting effect (hereinafter referred to as "the chance eye light-emitting effect") is performed for the decorative pattern (image) that constitutes the chance eye. In the following, a chance eye light-emitting effect will be described when an image suggesting a pseudo-relationship is stopped as the chance eye. Here, a light emitting effect for a pattern (image) that suggests a pseudo series may be referred to as a "pseudo continuous light emitting effect."

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance when a NEXT symbol suggesting a pseudo-connection is displayed in the normal game state. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the screen when the variable effect shown in FIG. 57 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, when the special symbol starts to change, the three decorative symbols 55 start to change (FIG. 61(A)). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stops in the left region (FIG. 61(B)), and then the decorative symbol 55 temporarily stops in the right region (FIG. 61(C)). Next, the "NEXT" symbol suggesting a pseudo-continuation moves from the top to the bottom in the middle area, and a pseudo-coupling effect is performed that makes the player expect a pseudo-continuation (FIG. 61(D)). Then, the "NEXT" symbol, which suggests that a pseudo-connection will be performed, temporarily stops in the middle area, and it is announced that a pseudo-connection will be performed (FIG. 61(E)).

For example, in a pseudo-connection promotion, an image written with "NEXT" that suggests a pseudo-connection and a decorative pattern 55 with numbers written on it are displayed in a fluctuating manner in the middle area that is the display area of the decorative pattern 55. An effect is performed as to whether or not the image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle area. In this case, an image in which "NEXT" is written may be displayed superimposed on the numeric decorative pattern 55 displayed in the middle area. Alternatively, in a pseudo-coupling effect, an image written with "NEXT" may be displayed semitransparently or moved in the display areas of the three decorative patterns 55 including the left area, middle area, and right area. You can. When an image with "NEXT" written on it is displayed in three display areas (when a translucent image changes to a clear image, or when a moving image is temporarily stopped), a pseudo You will be notified that a series will be held.

At this time, a pseudo continuous flash effect is performed in which the "NEXT" symbol emits light. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61(E), an effect image 92 is displayed around the "NEXT" symbol, and the "NEXT" symbol is highlighted. Note that the effect image 92 may be displayed in a superimposed manner in front of or behind the "NEXT" symbol. This effect image 92 includes the effect images 61 and 62 in the above-mentioned winning light-emitting effect, the effect image 91 used in the chance eye light-emitting effect related to the look-ahead chance eye, and the light-emitting effect (reach light emission) for the decorative pattern performed on the other liquid crystal screen 5. This is a different image from the effect image used for the effect image (light-up effect during non-reach). In addition, the effect image 92 of a color that suggests high or low reliability (for example, blue, green, red, or zebra that suggests the possibility of a jackpot; or rainbow color that suggests a jackpot) is created by a pseudo continuous flash effect. may be displayed. The color of the effect image 92 may, for example, be uniquely determined in accordance with the number of pseudo-coins, or may be determined by a random number lottery based on the result of special symbol determination by the performance control unit 130.

Further, as shown in the figure, the left and right decorative patterns 55 that were displayed until just before are hidden, and an image suggesting that a pseudo-connection will be performed may be displayed on the entire screen. It should be noted that during the pseudo continuous flash performance, the three decorative symbols 55 may be temporarily stopped, superimposed on the back side of the "NEXT" symbol, or may be fluctuated at high speed (or fluctuated at low speed). Additionally, in conjunction with this pseudo continuous flashing performance, a lamp lighting performance is also performed. The lamp lighting effects that correspond to this pseudo continuous flashing effect include the lamp lighting effect corresponding to the above-mentioned hit lighting effect, the lamp emission effect corresponding to the look-ahead chance, the lamp emission corresponding to the reach lighting effect, and the lamp emission effect during non-reach. This is a different effect from the corresponding lamp light emission. In the lamp light emission performance corresponding to the pseudo continuous light emission effect, the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 emit light in a color corresponding to the pseudo continuous light emission effect that suggests a pseudo continuous light emission effect. In addition, the lamp lighting effect that corresponds to the pseudo continuous flash effect will change the color that indicates the level of reliability (for example, blue, green, red, or zebra, which indicate the possibility of a jackpot. Or, the rainbow, which indicates a jackpot). The board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 may emit light depending on the color). This color may be uniquely determined in response to the pseudo continuous flash performance, or may be determined by random number lottery based on the result of special symbol determination by the performance control unit 130.

In addition, if the pseudo continuous flashing effect is not performed, the "NEXT" symbol will not be temporarily stopped (the image written as "NEXT" will not be temporarily stopped) as a result of the pseudo continuous flashing effect, and the above pseudo continuous flashing effect will continue. will not be held.

After the image suggesting that a pseudo-association will be performed is displayed, the three decorative patterns 55 change again (FIG. 61(F)). At this time, a pseudo number of times image 93 is displayed, for example, in the upper left area of the screen. The pseudo number image 93 is an image showing the number of pseudo series, and if it is the first re-variation ("pseudo 2"), an image written with "x2" is displayed. When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first re-fluctuation, the "NEXT" symbol may further temporarily stop (FIG. 61(G)). This notifies that the second re-variation ("pseudo 3") will be performed. Also at this time, the effect image 92 is displayed around the "NEXT" symbol.

Then, the second re-variation ("pseudo 3") is performed, and the pseudo number image 93 changes to "x3" (FIG. 61(H)). After that, the decorative patterns 55 of the same type on the left and right temporarily stop, a reach is established (FIG. 61(I)), and a reach effect is performed. From then on, the presentation proceeds in the same way as described above, so the explanation will be omitted.

Here, unlike the "1" to "9" symbols, the "NEXT" symbol that suggests a pseudo-connection is not a symbol with a number attached to it, nor is it a symbol used when notifying a hit. However, the "NEXT" pattern is an image that is displayed in a variable manner in the same way as the decorative pattern 55 with numbers attached in the area where the decorative pattern 55 changes. This allows the player to expect (guess) the result of special symbol determination. Therefore, the “NEXT” pattern can be regarded as a type of decorative pattern 55. It can be said that the pseudo continuous light emitting effect performed in conjunction with the temporary stop of the "NEXT" symbol is a light emitting effect for the decorative pattern. Note that the "NEXT" pattern may be an image different from the decorative pattern.

In addition, in FIG. 61, an example has been described in which an image suggesting a pseudo-association is displayed after the decorative pattern 55 is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, but the image suggesting a pseudo-association is displayed in the left area, the right area, The decorative pattern 55 may be displayed after being temporarily stopped in at least one area of the middle area.

Further, an image suggesting a pseudo-association may be displayed even if the decorative pattern 55 is not temporarily stopped in any of the left area, right area, and middle area. In this case, after the image suggesting the pseudo-coupling is displayed (temporarily stopped), the number of pseudo-couplings indicated by the pseudo-coupling image 93 is increased by "1". That is, even if none of the three decorative patterns 55 are temporarily stopped, a pseudo-connection may be performed, indicating that the current fluctuation will continue.

Further, although the performance shown in FIG. 61 is performed in the normal gaming state, the pseudo continuous and pseudo continuous light performance may also be performed in the variable probability gaming state and/or the time saving gaming state.

In addition, in FIG. 61, the case where a pseudo-connection is performed has been explained, but it is also possible to use a combination of specific decorative patterns (for example, combinations of "1", "2", and "3" symbols) that suggest that a specific effect will develop. Similarly, in the case where the chance number consisting of the winning number and the winning number of the winning number is displayed, the corresponding chance number light emitting effect may be performed for each decorative pattern according to the chance number. For example, the specific performance may be a performance that causes the player to expect the "7" symbols to stop. Note that the combination of specific decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped during the pre-reach performance, or may be temporarily stopped after the reach is established.

In addition, decorative patterns that suggest a specific performance, such as development patterns that suggest development into a reach performance (for example, an image with the word "development" written on it), have a relatively high reliability (around 10%). Chance symbols that suggest a chance (for example, an image written with "Chance") and intense heat symbols that suggest a confidence level of 50% or more (for example, an image written with "Very High") are temporarily stopped. Good too. Similar to the "NEXT" symbol, these images are also images that are displayed in a variable manner in the area where the decorative symbol 55 varies, and by being temporarily stopped from the fluctuating display state, the player is asked to judge the special symbol. It makes us expect (guess) the result. Therefore, these images can also be considered as a type of decorative pattern. Even when these images (decorative patterns) are temporarily stopped, a light emitting effect may be performed for the temporarily stopped images.

Moreover, in the above, when the decorative pattern 55 temporarily stops, a light emitting effect is performed on the decorative pattern. For example, when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a jackpot mode and before the decorative pattern 55 comes to a final stop, a winning light emitting effect (first light emitting effect and/or second light emitting effect) is performed. In addition, when displaying the look-ahead chance eye using the decorative pattern 55, the look-ahead chance eye light-up effect is performed when the decorative pattern 55 is displayed in a loss mode and before the decorative pattern 55 comes to a final stop. Ta. In the present embodiment, based on the result of special symbol determination or preliminary determination, a light emitting effect (light emitting effect at the time of start) for the decorative pattern 55 may be performed also when the decorative pattern 55 starts to fluctuate. The start light effect may be executed in a variation in which a winning light emission effect is performed, in a variation in which a winning light emission effect is not performed, or in a variation in which a look-ahead chance is displayed. Alternatively, the look-ahead chance may be executed in a variation in which the look-ahead chance is not displayed. The starting light emitting effect is different from the winning light emitting effect and the look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect, and is set in a color that indicates the level of reliability (for example, blue, green, red, or zebra, which indicates the possibility of a jackpot). Or, it is a display in which the decorative pattern 55 (a rainbow color that suggests a jackpot) emits light. For example, in the start light emission effect, when the three decorative patterns 55 start to fluctuate, a red effect image may be displayed for each of the three decorative patterns 55. The light-emitting effect at the start is a effect that suggests the degree of reliability in the current variation of the special symbol, and the reliability in the change may be suggested by the light-emitting color of the decorative pattern 55 in the light-emitting effect at the start. While the start light emitting effect and the look-ahead chance eye emitting effect have a plurality of effect modes (red, green, etc.), the winning light emission effect may have one effect mode.

In a variation in which a winning light emission effect is performed, the start light emission effect may be easily performed at the start of the variation. That is, when the start light emission effect is executed immediately after the special symbol starts changing, the winning light emission effect may be more likely to be performed during the variation of the special symbol than when the start time emission effect is not executed. Furthermore, if a winning light emitting effect is performed during the variation, the start light emitting effect may be more likely to be executed at the start of the variation than when a pre-read chance eye light emitting effect is performed during the variation. Further, when the start time light emission effect is executed, a pre-read chance light emission effect may be performed in the variation thereof.

As described above, even when the chance eye is displayed based on the result of the special symbol determination, the pre-read chance eye light-emitting effect for the decorative symbol 55 is performed. Thereby, it is possible to raise the expectations of the players and improve their interest.

Comparing the sizes of each image related to each of the above-mentioned light emission effects in this embodiment, effect image 82, effect image 62, effect image 64, non-reach light emission effect image 70, effect image 91, effect image 80, effect image 92 , effect image 60, effect image 63, and effect image 61 in this order. Note that the reach line image 81 is longer in the horizontal direction (longitudinal direction) than any of the above images. The reach line image 81 is shorter in the vertical direction (lateral direction) than the effect images 60, 61, 63, and 80, and longer than the effect image 82 at least.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display positions of each image related to each of the above-mentioned light emitting effects in the vertical direction (lateral direction) of the liquid crystal screen 5, the following relationships may be obtained. Specifically, for example, the upper ends of the effect images 60, 61, 63, 70, and 80 are located above the upper ends of the effect images 62 and 64 and the reach line image 81. Furthermore, the upper ends of the effect images 60, 61, 63, 70, and 80 may be located above or at the same position as the upper end of the effect image 80. Further, for example, the effect image 82 is located above the reach line image 81. Further, for example, the upper end of the non-reach light emitting effect image 70 and the upper ends of the effect images 91, 92 may be located below the upper ends of the effect images 60, 61, 63, 70, 80, or may be located above the upper ends of the effect images 60, 61, 63, 70, 80. may be located.

Each image related to each of the above light emitting effects (specifically, effect images 60 to 64, 70, 80, 82, 91, 92, and reach line image 81) may be erased in its entirety or in part. The time it takes to erase the data may vary depending on the data. For example, each of the above-mentioned images may be scattered in a radial manner from the center of the image, and even after the center has disappeared, the outline portions may remain here and there on the LCD screen 5 (for example, the decorative pattern 55 (may be displayed superimposed on the front side). Moreover, each of the above-mentioned images may be erased, for example, while the shape of the contour changes discontinuously (note that a portion may be interrupted) to such an extent that the contour cannot be clearly represented. Moreover, each of the above-mentioned images may be erased after, for example, the transmittance changes from near the contour toward the contour, so that the contour cannot be clearly represented.

Next, the swinging period of the decorative pattern 55 after the above-mentioned look-ahead chance eye light emitting performance, reach light emitting performance, and winning light emitting performance (first light emitting performance and/or second light emitting performance) is executed will be explained.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a comparison of the swing periods of the decorative symbols 55 when the look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect, the reach light emitting effect, and the winning light emitting effect are executed.

As shown in FIG. 62(A), when the look-ahead chance eye is executed, the three decorative symbols 55 are oscillate. Specifically, when the performance control unit 130 receives a fluctuation stop command from the game control unit 100, the performance control unit 130 causes the three decorative symbols 55 to be permanently stopped on the liquid crystal screen 5. After that, when a variation start command is received at the time of starting variation of the next special symbol, the production control unit 130 starts variation of the three decorative symbols 55 that have been stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62(B), when the ready-to-win effect is performed, the decorative pattern 55 swings for a predetermined period after the ready-to-win light emission effect is performed in response to the ready-to-win effect. Specifically, during the ready-to-win performance, the left and right decorative symbols 55 swing, and the decorative symbols 55 in the middle area fluctuate at high speed. Then, as a result of the reach effect, it is announced whether or not there is a jackpot, and after the three decorative symbols 55 oscillate for a predetermined period, the three decorative symbols 55 come to a final stop in response to a fluctuation stop command from the game control unit 100. do. After that, when a variation start command is received at the time of starting variation of the next special symbol, the production control unit 130 starts variation of the three decorative symbols 55 that have been stopped.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 62(C), when a winning notification is performed, after the winning lighting effect is performed, the three decorative patterns 55 swing and respond to the fluctuation stop command from the game control unit 100. Then, the three decorative patterns 55 stop. After that, an opening command is transmitted from the game control section 100 to the performance control section 130. The performance control unit 130 executes an opening performance based on the opening command, and further receives a round start command from the game control unit 100 to execute a jackpot performance. Next, the production control section 130 receives an ending command from the game control section 100 at the end of the jackpot game, and performs the ending production. Then, the production control unit 130 receives a variation start command based on the next special symbol determination from the game control unit 100, executes a variation production in which the decorative symbol 55 is varied based on the variation start command, and responds to the variation. A fluctuation stop command is received from the game control unit 100, and the decorative symbols 55 are permanently stopped.

When the production control unit 130 normally receives the command from the game control unit 100, the swinging period FT1 of the decorative symbol 55 after the pre-read chance eye light production starts (or ends) and the reach light production starts (or ends). Comparing the swinging period FT2 of the decorative pattern 55 after the end) and the swinging period FT3 of the decorative pattern 55 after the winning light emitting effect (first light emitting effect or second light emitting effect) has started (or ended). , FT1<FT3<FT2. These relationships may be FT3<FT1<FT2.

On the other hand, if the production control section 130 does not normally receive the command from the game control section 100, the relationship between the swing periods may change.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a comparison of the swing periods of decorative symbols when the production control section 130 does not normally receive the command from the game control section 100.

As shown in FIG. 63(A), when the production control unit 130 does not normally receive the command (variation stop command or next variation start command) from the game control unit 100 in the variation in which the look-ahead chance is executed , the swing period FT1 becomes FT1'. Specifically, if the fluctuation stop command is not received after the look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect is executed, the three decorative symbols 55 will not receive the next command from the game control unit 100 (the fluctuation stop command related to the next fluctuation). ) until it is received.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63(B), in the variation in which the reach effect is executed, the effect control unit 130 does not normally receive the command (variation stop command or next variation start command) from the game control unit 100. In this case, the swing period FT2 becomes FT2'. Specifically, if the fluctuation stop command is not received after the reach light emission effect is executed, the decorative pattern 55 receives the next command (variation stop command related to the next fluctuation) from the game control unit 100. It oscillates until.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 63(C), in a variation where a winning notification is executed, the performance control unit 130 does not normally receive a command (variation stop command or next variation start command) from the game control unit 100. In this case, the swing period FT3 becomes FT3'. Specifically, if the fluctuation stop command is not received after the winning light emitting effect is executed, the three decorative symbols 55 will not respond to the next command from the game control unit 100 (the next The device continues to oscillate until it receives a fluctuation stop command related to the fluctuation.

The relationship between the lengths of these swing periods FT1', FT2', and FT3' is FT1'<FT2'<FT3'.

That is, the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a game control section 100 that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control section 130 that controls the performance based on the progress of the game by the game control section 100. The game control unit 100 includes a special game determining means that determines whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and variably displays predetermined identification information based on the determination result by the special game determining means. and an identification information display means that stops displaying the display after a predetermined variation time has elapsed; a variation start command that indicates the start of the variation display of the predetermined identification information; and a variation stop command that indicates that the variation stop of the predetermined identification information is stopped; and command transmitting means capable of transmitting commands to the control means. The effect control section 130 has a command receiving means capable of receiving commands transmitted from the command transmitting means, and is also capable of displaying decorative pattern images and predetermined game effects in response to fluctuations in the identification information. The predetermined game production includes a ready-to-reach production that makes the decorative symbol image enter a ready-to-win state to make the user expect that the special game will be played, and a ready-to-reach lighting production for the decorative symbol image that is executed upon establishment of the ready-to-win state. , a winning light emitting effect for the decorative pattern image that is executed when the ready-to-win effect is completed and the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating execution of the special game. The first swing time (FT2) of the decorative pattern is from when the reach-to-reach light effect is executed to when the command receiving means receives a predetermined command (a command to stop fluctuation of the variation for which the reach-to-reach light effect has been executed). , a second swing time (FT3) of the decorative pattern from when the winning light emitting effect is executed until the command receiving means receives a predetermined command (a command to stop fluctuation of the fluctuation in which the winning light emitting effect was executed); longer than Furthermore, after the reach-to-reach light effect is executed, the next predetermined command (the change-to-stop command for the change for which the reach-to-reach light effect has been executed) is not received by the command receiving means. The third swing time (FT2') of the decorative pattern until the command receiving means receives the next fluctuation stop command) is the period from when the winning light emitting effect is executed to when the winning light emitting effect is executed. of the decorative pattern until the command receiving means receives the next predetermined command (the next fluctuation stop command after the fluctuation stop command) without the command receiving means receiving the command receiving means 4 swing time (FT3').

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a game control section 100 that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control section 130 that controls the performance based on the progress of the game by the game control section 100. The game control unit 100 includes a special game determining means that determines whether or not to play a special game based on the establishment of a starting condition, and variably displays predetermined identification information based on the determination result by the special game determining means. and an identification information display means that stops displaying the display after a predetermined variation time has elapsed; a variation start command that indicates the start of the variation display of the predetermined identification information; and a variation stop command that indicates that the variation stop of the predetermined identification information is stopped; and command transmitting means capable of transmitting commands to the control means. The effect control section 130 has a command receiving means capable of receiving commands transmitted from the command transmitting means, and is also capable of displaying decorative pattern images and predetermined game effects in response to fluctuations in the identification information. The predetermined game effect is to display a decorative pattern image in a predetermined manner (pre-read chance mode) to make the user expect that the special game will be played based on a later determination result by the special game determining means. A pre-judgment performance (pre-read chance eye), a pre-read chance eye light-emitting performance for the decorative symbol image executed in conjunction with the pre-judgment performance, and a determination by the special game determining means after the pre-judgment performance is completed. When it is determined that a special game is to be played, a win light emitting performance for the decorative pattern image is executed when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating execution of the special game. a fifth swinging time of the decorative pattern from when the pre-reading chance eye light-emitting effect is executed until the command receiving means receives a predetermined command (a command to stop fluctuation of the fluctuation for which the pre-reading chance eye-emitting effect has been executed); (FT1) is the second oscillation of the decorative pattern from when the winning light emitting effect is executed until the command receiving means receives a predetermined command (a command to stop the fluctuation of the variation in which the winning light emitting effect has been executed); It is shorter (or may be longer) than the time (FT3). Further, after the pre-reading chance eye light emitting effect is executed, the command receiving means does not receive a predetermined command (a command to stop fluctuation of the fluctuation for which the pre-reading chance eye emitting effect was executed) and the next predetermined command (the concerned The sixth swinging time (FT1') of the decorative pattern until the command receiving means receives a fluctuation stop command (the next fluctuation stop command after the fluctuation stop command) is a period from when the winning light emitting effect is executed to when a predetermined command (the fluctuation stop command) Until the command receiving means receives the next predetermined command (the next fluctuation stop command after the fluctuation stop command) without the command receiving means receiving the fluctuation stop command of the fluctuation for which the light emitting effect was executed. It is shorter than the fourth swing time (FT3') of the decorative pattern.

Note that a zone effect that makes the player expect a big win may be executed over the variable display of one or more special symbols. The zone performance is a performance that suggests whether or not there is a jackpot for the currently reserved special symbol judgment right (changes in the special symbol related to the reservation). For example, when a game ball enters the starting slot while the special symbols are changing, the right to determine the special symbol is reserved, and a determination (preliminary determination) is made as to whether or not it is a jackpot for the right. The zone performance is performed based on the result of the preliminary determination. For example, in a zone effect, a colored effect image indicating the level of reliability is displayed on the periphery of the liquid crystal screen 5, or a band-shaped image displaying the name of the zone effect is displayed on both the left and right ends of the liquid crystal screen 5. . In addition, in a zone production, even if the background image is switched to a special image or a predetermined character (for example, character A) appears, so that the player can recognize that the zone production is in progress. good.

When an effect image related to a zone effect is displayed, a non-reach light emission effect, a reach light emission effect, and a chance eye emission effect may be executed. The effect image related to the zone effect may be applied to the effect image related to each of the above-mentioned light emission effects. For this reason, the visibility of the effect images related to each of the light emission effects described above may be lowered by the effect images related to the zone effects.

On the other hand, even when the effect image related to the zone effect is displayed, at least the small symbol 56, the reserved digit 52, and the fourth symbols 57 and 59 are not affected by the effect image, and the small symbol 56, the reserved digit 52, and the fourth symbol 57, 59 are not affected by the effect image. The fourth symbols 57, 59 do not become invisible, nor do their visibility deteriorate.

Note that in this embodiment, the zone effect is not executed while the winning light emission effect is being executed. When the winning light emitting effect is executed, the zone effect ends before the winning light emitting effect starts (for example, at the start of the deciding effect).

In this embodiment, the zone effects include zone effects A and zone effects B. The execution of zone performance A indicates that the expectation level of a jackpot in the next and subsequent changes in special symbols is "medium" (for example, 10% to 20%). For example, zone effect A may be executed when a jackpot is determined in the preliminary judgment, but in the preliminary judgment, the variation pattern for losing with a slightly longer variation time of the special symbol (for example, a variation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect) This is an effect that is likely to be executed when a variation pattern) is determined.

Zone performance B is a performance with higher expectations than zone performance A. For example, zone performance B is a performance that is likely to be executed when a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time of the special symbol (for example, a variation pattern corresponding to the SPSP ready-to-win performance) is determined in advance determination. Zone effect B is more likely to be executed in response to a jackpot than in a case where the preliminary determination result is a loss. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fact that Zone Effect B is performed indicates that the expectation level for a jackpot is "high" (for example, 40% to 50%) in subsequent changes in special symbols.

Note that in this embodiment, the zone effect may be promoted to zone effect B via zone effect A. For example, while zone performance A is being executed, characters such as "I don't like this" may be displayed on the entire screen as a performance suggesting promotion to zone performance B. Zone effect B may be started upon erasure of this character.

Note that the zone performance is performed based on the result of special symbol determination, and may be a performance that suggests the result of the special symbol determination. In this case, the zone performance is started while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and is ended while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control unit 130]
Next, details of performance control based on various commands from the game control section 100 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 64 to 69.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing performed in the production control section 130. When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 131 of the performance control unit 130 repeatedly executes a series of processes shown in FIG. 64 at fixed time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) by interrupt. Note that part or all of the processes shown in FIGS. 64 to 69 may be executed by any of the effect control section 130, the image and sound control section 140, and the lamp control section 150.

The production control unit 130 (its CPU 131) first executes a command reception process (step S1001). The command reception process in step S1001 is a process for controlling the performance based on various commands from the game control unit 100. Specifically, the production control unit 130 receives a command from the game control unit 100, determines the content of the production according to the received command, and applies the determined production to the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. A command to be executed is generated and set in the RAM 133. Details of the command reception process in step S1001 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Following step S1001, the production control unit 130 performs a command transmission process of transmitting each command set in the RAM 133 to the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 (step S1002). For example, a command to start the fluctuating effect and a command to end the fluctuating effect set in the process of step S1001 are transmitted to the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the image and sound control unit 140 performs effects such as image display and audio output, and the lamp control unit 150 controls the operation of the movable accessory 7, the lighting of the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37, and the control of the effect buttons 26, etc. It will be done.

Following the process of step S1002, the effect control unit 130 executes a transfer process (step S1003). Specifically, when the production control unit 130 receives a control command from the image and sound control unit 140, the production control unit 130 transfers the control command to the lamp control unit 150. For example, the control commands from the image and sound control unit 140 include a control command for operating the movable accessory 7, a control command for operating the production button 26, and a control command for executing each of the lamp lighting productions described above. etc. Furthermore, when receiving a control command from the lamp control section 150, the production control section 130 transfers the control command to the image and sound control section 140. The control commands from the lamp control unit 150 include a control command indicating that the production button 26 has been operated. By transmitting and receiving control commands between the image sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150 via the production control section 130, the movable accessory 7 is moved in synchronization with the image displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. An image is displayed in response to an operation on the effect button 26, and a lamp light emission effect in which the board lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 emit light is executed.

[Command reception processing by production control unit 130]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 65, the command reception process executed in the production control unit 130 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command reception processing in step S1001 of FIG. 64.

First, the production control unit 130 determines whether or not a hold command transmitted from the game control unit 100 has been received (step S1301). If it is determined that a hold command has been received (step S1301: YES), the production control unit 130 executes hold command processing (step S1302). Details of the pending command processing will be described later.

When the process of step S1302 is executed, or when it is determined that the hold command has not been received (step S1301: NO), the production control unit 130 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received (step S1303). ).

When the fluctuation start command is received (step S1303: YES), the production control unit 130 executes fluctuation start command processing (step S1304). Specifically, in step S1304, the production control unit 130 determines the content of the variation production according to the variation of the special symbol based on the received variation start command, and sends the content to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. Generate commands to execute variable effects. The command is transmitted to the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 in the command transmission process of step S1002, and the variation effect is executed. Details of the fluctuation start command processing will be described later.

When the process of step S1304 is executed, or when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (step S1303: NO), the production control unit 130 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received (step S1305).

When the variation stop command is received (step S1305: YES), the production control unit 130 executes the variation stop command process (step S1306). Specifically, the effect control section 130 transmits a variable effect end command to the image and sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150 to end the variable effect. As a result, for example, the decorative pattern 51 that is being displayed in a variable manner (for example, temporarily stopped) on the liquid crystal screen 5 is permanently stopped, and the variable effect ends.

When the process of step S1306 is executed, or when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S1305: NO), the production control unit 130 determines whether or not the opening command has been received (step S1307). ).

When the opening command is received (step S1307: YES), the performance control unit 130 executes opening processing (step S1308). Specifically, the performance control unit 130 determines the opening performance based on the opening command transmitted when winning the jackpot, and causes the image and sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 to execute the opening performance.

When the process of step S1308 is executed, or when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (step S1307: NO), the production control unit 130 determines whether or not the ending command has been received (step S1309). .

When the ending command is received (step S1309: YES), the production control unit 130 executes the ending process (step S1310). In the ending process, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is executed.

When the process of step S1310 is executed, or when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (step S1309: NO), the effect control unit 130 ends the process shown in FIG. 48.

[Hold command processing by production control unit 130]
FIG. 66 is a detailed flowchart of the pending command processing in step 1302 of FIG. 65. The production control unit 130 first updates the pending number of special symbol determinations stored in the RAM 133 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S1320). Specifically, when a suspension command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the number of reservations for the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1", and a suspension command related to the second special symbol determination is received. In this case, the number of reservations for the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1".

Next, the production control unit 130 acquires the preliminary determination information included in the received hold command (step S1321).

Next, the performance control unit 130 determines by lottery whether or not to perform the preliminary determination performance based on the preliminary determination information (step S1322). For example, the performance control unit 130 determines whether or not to change the display mode of the pending icon 51 to a display mode with higher expectations than usual, and the scenario of the change, as a predetermined performance. For example, it is determined whether or not to change the hold icon 51 related to the current prize winning into the starting hole to a mode with high expectations at the time of winning, and whether to change it in the next and subsequent variations of special symbols.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 130 determines whether or not to display the above-mentioned pre-read chance number as a predetermined performance. Specifically, the production control unit 130 executes a production (pre-read chance production) that displays the above-mentioned pre-read chance number in a variation before the variation of the special symbol related to the current winning (pre-judgment target variation). Decide whether or not to do so, and its period (the number of fluctuations for displaying the look-ahead chance items). Here, a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a reach effect is performed) is selected in the target variation of the preliminary determination, and a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a reach effect is performed) is selected in the variation before the target variation. If the variable pattern) is not selected, the performance control unit 130 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead chance performance based on a predetermined lottery.

Subsequently, the production control unit 130 determines the winning sound when displaying the hold icon 51 related to the winning in the current starting opening (step S1323). For example, the performance control unit 130 determines different winning sounds depending on the color of the hold icon 51 determined in step S1322.

Next, the production control unit 130 sets a hold increase command based on the results of the processing in steps S1322 and S1323 (step S1324). By transmitting this hold increase command to the image and sound control unit 140, the hold icon 51 related to the winning of the current starting slot is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 in the display mode determined in step S1322, and The winning sound determined in S1323 is output. Further, in response to this hold increase command, the number indicated by the hold numeral 52 is increased by "1".

[Variation start command processing by production control unit 130]
FIG. 67 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command processing in step 1304 of FIG. 65.

The effect control unit 130 analyzes the received variation start command (step S1340). This fluctuation start command includes symbol information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process (whether it is a jackpot or not, jackpot symbol, etc.), whether this symbol information is related to the first special symbol determination, and the second special symbol. It includes winning start opening information indicating whether it is related to the determination, information on the variation pattern of the special symbol, information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. The production control unit 130 can identify the result of special symbol determination by analyzing the variation start command. That is, it is possible to specify whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot and the variation pattern (variation time). Further, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

After analyzing the variation start command, the production control unit 130 determines a production pattern indicating the content of the variation production accompanying the variation display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S1341). Specifically, based on the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, the production control unit 130 controls the variation mode of the decorative symbol, the presence or absence of a pseudo-connection, the presence or absence of a reach effect, the presence or absence of the above-mentioned various light emission effects, and its mode. etc. to be determined. Further, if it is determined in step S1322 to execute the pre-read chance eye effect as the pre-determined effect, the effect control unit 130 determines the mode of the pre-read chance eye effect and the mode of the pre-read chance eye light emission effect.

Next, the performance control unit 130 performs a lottery using random performance numbers to determine whether or not to perform various preview performances while the variable performance according to the performance pattern determined in step S1341 is being performed; , the contents of the preview presentation, etc. are determined (step S1342).

Next, the performance control unit 130 sets in the RAM 133 a variable performance start command that instructs execution of a variable performance based on the performance pattern determined in steps S1341 and S1342 (step S1343). This variation effect start command is transmitted to the image and sound control section 140 and the lamp control section 150. Thereby, the determined variation effect is executed by the image and sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

Following the process of step S1343, the production control unit 130 subtracts "1" from the number of reservations stored in the RAM 133 (step S1344).

[Timer interrupt processing by image sound control unit 140]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, a description will be given of the timer interrupt processing executed in the image/acoustic control section 140. FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image and sound control unit 140. The image-acoustic control unit 140 repeats the series of processes illustrated in FIG. 68 at regular intervals (for example, 1/60 seconds) during normal operation, excluding special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Execute.

First, the image and sound control unit 140 (the CPU 141 thereof) determines whether or not a variable performance start command has been received from the performance control unit 130 (step S1401). Upon receiving the variable effect start command, the image sound control unit 140 starts a variable effect according to the content of the variable effect included in the variable effect start command (step S1402). As a result, the decorative pattern 55 starts to fluctuate on the liquid crystal screen 5, and a fluctuating effect is executed. Further, an animation in which each hold icon 51 is moved to the right side is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and the number indicated by the hold numeral 52 is decreased by "1".

When the process of step S1402 is executed, or when the determination is NO in step S1401, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not an operation command corresponding to the operation on the production button 26 has been received (step S1403). . When the operation command is received (step S1403: YES), the image sound control unit 140 controls the variation effect according to the operation command (step S1404). The image and sound control unit 140 sets a valid period during which the operation on the performance button 26 is valid during the variable performance. For example, a valid period is set in the deciding performance just before the winning notification. If an operation command is received during the valid period, the image and sound control unit 140 executes an effect according to the operation. For example, when performing a pattern alignment effect or a role object movement effect in response to an operation on the effect button 26 in a determined effect, the image sound control unit 140 displays images related to the pattern alignment effect or role object movement effect on a liquid crystal display according to the operation. Display it on screen 5.

When the process of step S1404 is executed, or when the determination is NO in step S1403, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether it is the timing to perform the lamp light emission effect (step S1405). If it is the timing to execute the lamp lighting performance (step S1405: YES), the image and sound control unit 140 transmits a control command related to the lamp lighting performance to the performance control unit 130 (step S1406). This control command is transmitted to the lamp control section 150 via the production control section 130.

When the process of step S1406 is executed, or when the determination is NO in step S1405, the image sound control unit 140 determines whether or not a variation effect end command has been received (step S1407). If the fluctuating performance end command is received (step S1407: YES), the image sound control unit 140 ends the fluctuating performance (step S1408). Specifically, the image sound control unit 140 stops the decorative pattern 51 swinging on the liquid crystal screen 5.

In addition to the processing shown in FIG. 68, the image and sound control unit 140 performs processing related to hold commands, processing related to opening effects, processing related to jackpot game effects during jackpot games, processing related to ending effects, etc. As a result, the pending icon 51 is displayed, the opening performance is performed, the jackpot game performance is performed, and the ending performance is performed.

[Lamp control processing by lamp control unit 150]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, lamp control processing performed in the lamp control section 150 will be described. FIG. 69 is a detailed flowchart of lamp control processing by the lamp control section 150.

As shown in FIG. 69, the lamp control unit 150 determines whether or not an operation on the production button 26 is detected (step S1501). If an operation on the effect button 26 is detected (step S1501: YES), the lamp control unit 150 transmits an operation command to the effect control unit 130 (step S1502). This operation command is transmitted to the image sound control section 140 via the production control section 130.

When step S1502 is executed, or when the determination is NO in step S1501, the lamp control unit 150 determines whether or not a control command related to lamp light emission effect has been received (step S1503). If a control command related to the lamp lighting performance is received (step S1503: YES), the lamp control unit 150 controls the lamp lighting performance (step S1504). The lamp control unit 150 stores a plurality of light emission patterns for causing the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 to emit light. For example, the lamp control unit 150 may control a light emission pattern corresponding to a reach light emission effect, a light emission pattern corresponding to a pattern matching effect, a light emission pattern corresponding to an accessory operation effect, a light emission pattern corresponding to a first light emission effect, a light emission pattern corresponding to a second light emission effect. , a light emitting pattern corresponding to a look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect, a light emitting pattern corresponding to a pseudo continuous light emitting effect, etc. are stored. The control command includes information indicating any one of these plurality of light emission patterns. The lamp control unit 150 reads a pre-stored light emission pattern in accordance with the received control command, and executes a lamp light emission effect that causes the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 to emit light. After receiving the control command, the lamp control unit 150 controls the light emission of the panel lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 based on a pre-stored light emission pattern.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various light emitting effects can be performed using decorative symbols during the variable effect, and the interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and may take the following forms.

For example, in the above embodiment, an example was described in which the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed after the SPSP reach effect is performed, but other reach effects (N reach effect, SP reach effect) are performed. The first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed later. Furthermore, when a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time (for example, OP4) is selected, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed, and the variation pattern with a relatively short variation time (for example, OP1) is selected. When selected, at least one of the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may not be performed. Furthermore, even if a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is prepared in which a reach effect is not performed and the three decorative symbols 55 temporarily stop in a jackpot mode (direct hit effect), a variation pattern is prepared. good. When a variation pattern for performing this direct hit effect is selected, both the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed, or at least one of the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed. It doesn't have to be done.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the light emission is executed in conjunction with each light emission effect (specifically, the winning light emission effect, the non-reach light emission effect, the first reach symbol emission effect, the reach line effect, and the chance eye emission effect). The board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37 are designed to emit light in a light emitting pattern that allows the type of performance to be determined. In another embodiment, the light emitting patterns for each of the light emitting effects described above may be displayed without displaying each image (specifically, the effect images 60 to 64, 70, 80, 82, 91, and 92) related to each of the above light emitting effects. Each of the above-described light emitting effects may be realized by emitting light from the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative pattern 55 is displayed on the image display means (liquid crystal display device 5) that displays an image, and the image display means performs a light emitting effect on the decorative pattern 55. In another embodiment, a decorative pattern is displayed not only on the image display device but also on another display device (for example, a 7-segment display capable of displaying numbers “0” to “9”), and a light emitting effect for the decorative pattern is displayed. May be done.

Further, other embodiments may include a main liquid crystal display device corresponding to the liquid crystal screen 5 of this embodiment and a sub liquid crystal display device (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as "main liquid crystal", "sub liquid crystal"). ). For example, the sub-liquid crystal is an image display device with a smaller display screen than the main liquid crystal. For example, the sub liquid crystal is configured to be movable with respect to the game board 2, and the main liquid crystal can be moved in the width direction (horizontal direction relative to the player), height direction (vertical direction relative to the player), and diagonal direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The front side of the liquid crystal can be moved and rotated. When the sub-LCD is not in operation, it is placed at an initial position (for example, on the side of the main LCD) that does not reduce the visibility of the effect image displayed on the main LCD as much as possible, so that part or all of it can be viewed by the player. be placed in a possible position. The front and back surfaces of the sub-liquid crystal are decorated with a predetermined decoration, and have a built-in light emitting element (not shown) such as an LED that can emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern. Therefore, even when no image is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect. In such a configuration, for example, the effect images 60 to 64 related to the hit light effect, the non-reach light effect image 70, the images 80 to 82 related to the reach light effect, and the effect images 91 and 92 related to the chance eye light effect. It may also be displayed on the sub-LCD. The corresponding decorative pattern 55 may be displayed on the main liquid crystal or on the sub liquid crystal. Note that each of the above-mentioned light-emitting effects may be executed by causing the sub-liquid crystal to emit light in the light-emitting pattern for each of the above-mentioned light-emitting effects.

Moreover, the various values (for example, fluctuation time, probability, etc.) illustrated in the above embodiment are merely examples, and values different from those described above may be used.

Further, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented with other configurations. Furthermore, the order of processing, set values, threshold values used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be implemented with other orders and values as long as they do not depart from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.

Further, in the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, but the present invention is also applicable to other game machines such as a slot machine.

[Configuration of gaming machine according to the present invention and its effects]
As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. Note that the parentheses indicate the correspondence with the embodiment, and are merely examples.

(Configuration 1)
In the case of a jackpot, the gaming machine according to configuration 1 uses the first light emitting effect ( For example, displaying an effect image 61) is performed, and after the first light emission performance, a second light emission performance (for example, displaying an effect image 62) is performed.

Here, "performing the first light emitting effect when displaying a decorative pattern suggesting that a jackpot game will be played" means that the first light emitting effect is performed when a decorative pattern suggesting that a jackpot game is being played is displayed. When performing a light emitting effect, when performing the first light emitting effect at the timing when a decorative pattern suggesting that a jackpot game will be played, or immediately before displaying a decorative pattern suggesting that a jackpot game will be played. This includes the case where the first light emission effect is performed.

According to configuration 1, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect can be performed in a state where the decorative pattern suggesting that a jackpot game is to be played is displayed before the main stop of the decorative pattern. Decorative patterns suggesting that a game is to be played can be emphasized.

(Configuration 2)
In the case of a jackpot, the gaming machine according to configuration 2 performs a light emitting effect (first At least one of a light emission effect and a second light emission effect) is performed. Depending on the game state, a light emitting effect may or may not be performed.

For example, in the normal game state, both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are executed, while in the variable probability game state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than in the normal game state, the first light emitting effect is executed but the second light emitting effect is executed. It is not necessary to perform the light emission effect. Further, in the variable probability game state, the second light emission effect is executed, but the first light emission effect may not be executed.

According to this configuration 2, when displaying a decorative pattern suggesting that a jackpot game will be played, it is possible to prevent the light emitting effect from being performed, for example, in a variable probability game state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light emitting effect from being repeated in a relatively short period of time, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

(Configuration 3)
In the case of a jackpot, the gaming machine according to configuration 3 performs the first light emitting effect when displaying a decorative pattern (for example, a matching pattern) that suggests that a jackpot game will be played until the special symbol is stopped and displayed. After the first light emitting effect, the second light emitting effect is performed. The decorative patterns include a plurality of types of patterns including a first pattern (eg, an odd pattern) and a second pattern (eg, an even pattern) different from the first pattern. When displaying the first symbol (a set of "3" symbols) that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are performed, and the case that suggests that a jackpot game will be played. When displaying the second symbol (a set of "4" symbols), the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect may be performed.

According to this configuration 3, even when the first symbol suggesting that a jackpot game will be played is displayed, and even when the second symbol suggesting that a jackpot game will be played, the first light emission A performance and a second light emission performance can be performed, and a decorative pattern suggesting that a jackpot game will be played can be emphasized.

(Configuration 4)
In the case of a jackpot, the gaming machine according to configuration 4 performs a light emitting effect when displaying a decorative pattern suggesting that a jackpot game will be played until the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern includes a first pattern (for example, a pattern with any number from "1" to "9") and a second pattern that is different from the first pattern (for example, a pattern with a number). There are multiple types of symbols, including special symbols (not shown). When displaying the first symbol (alignment of numerical symbols) that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, a predetermined light-emitting effect (for example, the first light-emitting effect and/or the second light-emitting effect when the symbols are aligned) is performed. , when displaying a second symbol (special symbol) that suggests that a jackpot game will be played, a luminous effect different from the above-mentioned predetermined luminous effect (for example, the first luminous effect and/or the second luminescent effect when the special symbol stops) is displayed. (light-emitting effect).

According to this configuration 4, the light emission differs between when the first symbol suggesting that a jackpot game will be played and when the second symbol suggesting that a jackpot game will be played. It is possible to perform performances, diversify performances, and improve interest.

(Configuration 5)
The gaming machine according to configuration 5 has a plurality of jackpot games including a first jackpot game (4R normal jackpot) and a second jackpot game (10R probability variable jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot game. It is possible to play games. When the first jackpot game is played, a decorative symbol indicating that the first jackpot game will be played is displayed until the special symbol stops displaying (4R normal jackpot in the probability variable game state). (In the case that irregular patterns are displayed) The first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are not performed. When a second jackpot game is played, the first light emission occurs when displaying a decorative pattern (a set of "7" symbols) indicating that a second jackpot game will be played until the special symbol is stopped and displayed. A performance is performed, and after the first light emission performance, a second light emission performance is performed.

According to configuration 5, for example, when winning an unfavorable jackpot that shifts to the normal gaming state, a decorative pattern suggesting that a first jackpot game will be played is displayed, and the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are displayed. If the game is not executed and an advantageous jackpot is won, a decorative pattern suggesting that a second jackpot game will be played is displayed, and the first light emission performance and the second light emission performance can be executed.

(Configuration 6)
The gaming machine according to configuration 6 has a decorative pattern (for example, a look-ahead chance pattern, a corresponding chance pattern (a specific pattern combination , a pseudo continuous pattern, a temporary stop of a developed pattern, etc.)), it is possible to perform a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, a look-ahead chance eye light emitting effect, a pseudo continuous light emitting effect, etc.). In the case of a jackpot, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a specific light-emitting effect (the first light-emitting effect in the winning light-emitting effect and / or second light emission effect).

According to configuration 6, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that does not suggest that a jackpot game will be played, a predetermined light emitting effect is performed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that suggests that a jackpot game will be played. In this case, a specific light emitting effect is performed. As a result, even if a jackpot game is not played, it is possible to make the player look forward to it, and it is possible to improve the level of interest.

(Configuration 7)
The gaming machine according to configuration 7 uses a predetermined light emitting effect when displaying the decorative pattern (for example, a chance eye) in a manner that suggests that a jackpot game may be played but does not suggest that a jackpot game will be played. (For example, it is possible to perform a look-ahead chance eye light-up effect). In the case of a jackpot, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a specific light-emitting effect (the first light-emitting effect in the winning light-emitting effect and / or second light emission effect). The time from the end of a predetermined light emitting performance until the decorative pattern comes to a full stop is different from the time from the end of a specific light emitting performance until the decorative pattern comes to a full stop.

According to configuration 7, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that does not suggest that a jackpot game will be played, a predetermined light emitting effect is performed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that suggests that a jackpot game will be played. In this case, a specific light emitting effect is performed. The period from the end of a predetermined light emitting effect to the main stop of the decorative pattern is different from the period from the end of a specific light emitting effect to the main stop of the decorative pattern. For example, if the period from the end of a specific light emitting effect to the main stop of the decorative pattern is longer than the period from the end of a predetermined light emitting effect to the main stop of the decorative pattern, the specific light emitting effect may be executed for a longer period of time. This allows the player to feel a sense of satisfaction in playing a jackpot game. Furthermore, if the period from the end of the specific light emitting effect to the actual stop of the decorative pattern is shorter, the specific light emitting effect can be performed in a shorter time and the jackpot game can be executed quickly.

(Configuration 8)
The gaming machine according to configuration 8 uses a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, a chance eye) when displaying a decorative pattern (for example, a chance eye) in a manner that suggests that there is a possibility that a jackpot game will be played and does not suggest that a jackpot game will be played. For example, it is possible to perform a look-ahead chance eye light-emitting effect). In the case of a jackpot, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a specific light emitting effect (the first light emitting effect in the winning light emitting effect) may be used when displaying a decorative pattern (for example, a set of symbols) that suggests that a jackpot game will be played. and/or a second light emission effect). The execution time of the predetermined light emission effect and the execution time of the specific light emission effect are different.

According to configuration 8, when the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that does not suggest that a jackpot game will be played, a predetermined light emitting effect is performed, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that suggests that a jackpot game will be played. In this case, a specific light emitting effect is performed. The execution time of the predetermined light emission effect and the execution time of the specific light emission effect are different. For example, if the execution time of a specific light emission effect is longer than the execution time of a predetermined light emission effect, the specific light emission effect can be executed for a longer time, giving the player a sense of satisfaction from playing a jackpot game. You can hold it. Further, when the execution time of the specific light emitting effect is shorter, the specific light emitting effect can be performed in a shorter time and the jackpot game can be executed faster.

(Configuration 9)
The gaming machine according to configuration 9 displays the decorative pattern (for example, temporarily stops) in the first mode (for example, the mode illustrated in FIG. ), and the second mode (for example, the mode illustrated in FIG. 24(N)) that notifies that a jackpot game will be executed during the variable display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform a second light emitting effect that is executed when displaying (for example, temporarily stopping).

According to this configuration 9, when notifying that a jackpot game will be executed, the first light emitting effect is executed when displaying the decorative pattern of the first mode, and the first light emitting effect is executed when the decorative pattern of the first mode is displayed before the decorative pattern stops displaying. The second light emitting effect is executed when displaying the decorative pattern. As a result, the light emitting effect is executed twice with different decorative patterns, so the impression of the light emitting effect can be made different, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

(Configuration 10)
The gaming machine according to configuration 10 is configured to perform a first game that is executed when displaying decorative symbols (for example, temporarily stopping) in a manner that notifies that a jackpot game will be executed during the variable display of special symbols (for example, when the symbols are aligned). A light emission effect and a second light emission effect can be performed. The first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect have different execution times (for example, the first light emitting effect is executed at a timing earlier than the second light emitting effect. Also, the length of time required for the first light emitting effect is (This differs from the length of time required for the second light emission effect.)

According to this configuration 10, when notifying that a jackpot game will be executed, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are executed at different execution times. Thereby, it is possible to change the impression that each light emitting effect gives to the player.

(Configuration 11)
The gaming machine according to configuration 11 is configured to perform a first game that is executed when displaying decorative symbols (for example, temporarily stopping) in a manner that notifies that a jackpot game will be executed during the variable display of special symbols (for example, when the symbols are aligned). It is possible to perform a light emission effect and a second light emission effect different from the first light emission effect (for example, the effect image 61 related to the first light emission effect and the effect image 62 related to the second light emission effect are different images). be.

According to this configuration 11, different light emitting effects can be executed twice when displaying decorative patterns in a manner to notify that a jackpot game will be executed. Thereby, the impression given to the player by each light emitting performance can be changed, and it is possible to effectively prevent the performance from becoming monotonous when notifying that a jackpot game will be executed.

(Configuration 12)
The gaming machine according to configuration 12 is configured to display a specific light-emitting effect (for example, a hit) when displaying decorative symbols in a manner (for example, a pattern matching) that notifies that a jackpot game will be executed during the variable display of special symbols. A predetermined light emitting effect (e.g., reach emitting effect, non-reach emitting effect, look-ahead effect) that is executed when displaying decorative symbols in a manner that does not notify that a jackpot game will be executed (e.g., loss mode). It is possible to execute the chance eye light emitting effect and the chance eye light emitting effect). The number of times these light emitting effects are performed is the first number of times in the case of the first variation pattern, and the number of times of execution of these light emission effects is the second number of times that is greater than the first number of times in the case of the second variation pattern.

According to this configuration 12, it is possible to vary the number of times the light emitting effect is executed depending on the type of variation pattern. Thereby, it is possible to effectively prevent monotony by giving a range to the performance.

(Configuration 13)
The gaming machine according to configuration 13 is configured to display a specific light-emitting effect (for example, a hit) when displaying decorative symbols in a manner that notifies that a jackpot game will be executed (for example, a pattern matching) during the variable display of special symbols. A predetermined light emitting effect (e.g., a reachable light emitting effect, a non-reach mode) that is executed when displaying a decorative pattern in a manner that does not notify that a jackpot game will be executed (e.g., a reach mode or a losing mode). A light emission effect, a look-ahead chance eye light emission effect, and a corresponding chance eye light emission effect) can be performed. The number of times the light emitting effect is executed during the variable display of the special symbol is different between the first symbol (for example, the left symbol) and the second symbol (for example, the middle symbol).

According to this configuration 13, it is possible to make the number of executions of the light emitting effect different between the first symbol and the second symbol. Thereby, it is possible to effectively prevent the performance during the variable display of special symbols from becoming monotonous.

(Configuration 14)
The gaming machine according to configuration 14 includes a specific light-emitting effect (for example, a winning light-emitting effect) that is executed when displaying the decorative pattern in a manner that notifies that a jackpot game will be executed during the variable display of the special symbol; A predetermined light emitting effect (for example, a reach light effect, a non-reach light effect, a look-ahead chance eye light effect, and the chance eye light effect) that is executed when displaying decorative symbols in a manner that does not notify that a jackpot game will be executed. performance) and can be executed. The light emitting effect can be performed a first number of times when the game is in a first game state (for example, a normal game state), and can be performed a second number of times that is greater than the first time when it is in a second game state (for example, a variable probability game state). It is.

According to this configuration 14, it is possible to make the number of executions of the light emitting effect different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature in which the game state can be guessed based on the number of executions of the light emitting effect.

(Configuration 15)
The gaming machine according to configuration 15 executes a predetermined light-emitting effect (for example, a second ready-to-win symbol light-emitting effect) that is executed when displaying decorative symbols in a ready-to-win mode during a ready-to-win effect, and a jackpot game as the light-emitting effect. It is possible to perform a specific light emitting effect (for example, a winning light emitting effect) that is executed when the decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that notifies the user of the problem. In the first gaming state (for example, normal gaming state), a predetermined light emitting effect and a specific light emitting effect can be executed. Further, in the case of the second game state (for example, variable probability game state), it is possible to execute a specific light emission effect without executing the predetermined light emission effect.

According to this configuration 15, in the second game state, it is possible to execute a specific light emission effect without executing the predetermined light emission effect, and in the first game state, it is possible to execute both of these light emission effects. be. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature in which the game state can be guessed based on the presence or absence of the light emission effect during the ready-to-reach effect.

(Configuration 16)
The gaming machine according to configuration 16 includes a specific light emitting effect (for example, a winning light emitting effect) that is executed when displaying a decorative pattern in a manner that notifies that a jackpot game will be executed as a light emitting effect, and a specific light emitting effect that is executed when a jackpot game is executed. It is possible to perform a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, a non-reach light emitting effect, a look-ahead chance eye emitting effect, and a corresponding chance eye emitting effect) that is executed when displaying a decorative pattern in a manner that does not notify that the decorative pattern will be displayed. be. When informing that a jackpot game will not be executed, and when a reach effect is executed, a specific light emission effect and a predetermined light emission effect will not be executed (for example, when a reach loss result is displayed, a winning effect effect and a non-reach effect are displayed). (Do not perform light emitting effects). When informing that a jackpot game will not be executed and the reach effect is not executed, the above-mentioned predetermined light emitting effect can be executed (for example, while the winning eyes other than the reaching losing eyes are displayed, the non-reaching light emitting effect is executed. Possible). When notifying that a jackpot game will be executed, the above-mentioned specific light-emitting effect can be executed (for example, the first light-emitting effect can be executed while a set of symbols is being displayed).

According to this configuration 16, the light emitting effect can be executed when the ready-to-win effect is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed, and when the execution of the jackpot game is notified. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate of the light emitting effect from becoming extremely low. Moreover, when a jackpot game is not executed and a reach-for-win effect is executed, the specific light emission effect and the predetermined light emission effect are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from becoming bored due to the appearance of too many light-emitting effects.

(Configuration 17)
The gaming machine according to configuration 17 includes a first light-emitting effect and a second light-emitting effect, which are executed when displaying decorative symbols in a manner that notifies that a jackpot game will be executed during variable display of special symbols; is possible. When a reach effect is executed while a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, when informing that a jackpot game will not be executed, it is necessary to notify the player during the first gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) and during the second gaming state (for example, variable probability gaming state). In either case, the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are not executed (for example, while the win-losing number is displayed, the winning light-emitting effect is not executed regardless of the gaming state). When notifying that a jackpot game will be executed, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect can be executed either during the first game state or during the second game state.

According to this configuration 17, regardless of the gaming state, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are not executed when the ready-to-win effect is executed and it is notified that the jackpot game is not executed. In addition, regardless of the gaming state, when notifying that the jackpot game will not be executed, the first light emission effect and the second light emission effect are executed. Thereby, it is possible to provide a sense of unity between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.

(Configuration 18)
The gaming machine according to configuration 18 is capable of executing a light-emitting effect (for example, a winning light-emitting effect and a non-reach light-emitting effect) that is executed when displaying a decorative symbol during a variable display of special symbols. If the reach effect is executed when the jackpot game is not executed, the above-mentioned light emission effect is not executed (for example, the winning emission effect and the non-reach emission effect are not executed while the reach losing number is displayed), and the jackpot game is executed. In the case where the reach effect is not executed, the above-mentioned light emission effect can be executed (for example, the non-reach light emission effect can be executed while a losing eye other than a reach lose eye is displayed). The light-emitting effects include a first light-emitting effect and a second light-emitting effect, which are executed when displaying a decorative pattern in a manner to notify that a jackpot game will be executed. When executing a jackpot game, during control in the first game state (for example, normal game state), the first light emission effect and the second light emission are performed during the first time (for example, a time longer than the execution time of the non-reach light emission effect). It is possible to perform the following. During control in the second gaming state (for example, variable probability gaming state), the first light emitting effect is activated at a second time (for example, a time different from the execution time of the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect during control in the first gaming state). It is possible to perform a light emission effect and a second light emission effect.

According to this configuration 18, the light emitting effect can be executed when the ready-to-win effect is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed, and when the jackpot game is executed. Thereby, even if the light-emission effect is not performed when the ready-to-reach effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate of the light-emission effect from becoming extremely low. Further, when a jackpot game is executed, a light emitting effect can be executed at an execution time depending on the game state.

(Configuration 19)
The gaming machine according to configuration 19 is capable of executing a light emitting effect that is executed when displaying a decorative pattern during a variable display of a special pattern. The light-emitting effects include a specific light-emitting effect (for example, a winning light-emitting effect) that is executed when displaying a decorative pattern in a manner that notifies that a jackpot game will be executed, and a mode that does not notify that a jackpot game will be executed. There are predetermined light emitting effects (for example, a non-reach light emitting effect, a look-ahead chance eye emitting effect, and the chance eye emitting effect) that are executed when displaying a decorative pattern. When informing that a jackpot game will not be executed, the above-mentioned specific light-emitting effect and the above-mentioned predetermined light-emitting effect will not be executed when a reach-to-win effect is executed (for example, when a reach-to-win effect is displayed, a winning light-emitting effect and a non-reaching effect are displayed). If the reach effect is not executed, a predetermined light emission effect can be executed for a predetermined execution time (for example, when a losing eye other than a reaching lose eye is displayed, a non-reach light effect is executed). ). When notifying that a jackpot game will be executed, the specific light emitting effect can be executed at a different execution time from the predetermined execution time (for example, the winning light emitting effect may be executed at a different time than the predetermined execution time while a set of symbols is displayed). (can be executed with different execution times).

According to this configuration 19, the light emitting effect can be executed when the ready-to-win effect is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed, and when the jackpot game is executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate of the light-emitting effect from becoming extremely low even if the light-emitting effect is not performed when the ready-to-reach effect is executed. Further, by making the specific light emitting effect and the predetermined light emitting effect different in execution time, it is possible to prevent the light emitting effect from becoming monotonous.

(Configuration 20)
The gaming machine according to configuration 20 performs a predetermined effect during the variable display of special symbols (for example, a reach effect in which a chance up is executed), and stops displaying decorative symbols when notifying that a jackpot game will be executed. It is possible to perform a light-emission effect (for example, a winning light-emission effect) that is executed. During the predetermined performance, the light emitting means (eg, board lamp 25 and/or frame lamp 37) is caused to emit light in the first light emission pattern, and during the light emission performance, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in the second light emission pattern.

According to this configuration 20, the light emission pattern during the predetermined effect and during the light emission effect can be made different. Thereby, it is possible to provide a variety of performance modes.

(Configuration 21)
The gaming machine according to configuration 21 is capable of executing a light emitting effect that is executed when displaying a decorative pattern during a variable display of a special pattern. The light-emitting effects include a specific light-emitting effect (for example, a winning light-emitting effect) that is executed when a decorative pattern is displayed in a manner that notifies that a jackpot game will be executed, and a decorative pattern that is displayed in a reach mode during a reach effect. There is a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, a second ready-to-win symbol light emitting effect) that is executed when the game is performed. During a specific light emitting effect, the light emitting means (for example, board lamp 25 and/or frame lamp 37) is caused to emit light in a first light emitting pattern, and during a predetermined light emitting effect, the light emitting means is caused to emit light in a second light emitting pattern corresponding to the reach effect. let

According to this configuration 21, a specific light emission effect and a predetermined light emission effect can be executed as the light emission effect. This allows for a wide variety of light emission effects. Moreover, since the light emitting means can emit light in the second light emission pattern corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect during the predetermined light-emitting effect, it is possible to emphasize the ready-to-reach effect than the predetermined light-emitting effect.

(Configuration 22)
In the gaming machine according to configuration 22, when displaying the decorative pattern in a manner that suggests that a jackpot game may be played but does not suggest that a jackpot game will be played, a predetermined light emitting effect (for example, chance eye light emitting At the same time, it is possible to make a predetermined light emitting means (for example, the board lamp 25 and/or the frame lamp 37) emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the predetermined light emission effect (lamp light emission effect corresponding to the chance). be. In the case of a jackpot, when displaying a decorative pattern (sequence of symbols) that suggests that a jackpot game will be played until the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a specific light-emitting effect (the first light-emitting effect in the winning light-emitting effect and / or second light emitting effect) and also cause the light emitting means to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (lamp light emitting effect corresponding to the winning light emitting effect).

According to this configuration 22, in addition to the above configuration 6, a predetermined light emission effect or a specific light emission effect is performed and the light emitting means is caused to emit light. Therefore, in addition to the effect of the above configuration 6, the light emitting means can be caused to emit light in conjunction with each of the predetermined light emitting effect and the specific light emitting effect, thereby further increasing the interest.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 5 Liquid crystal display device 7 Movable accessory 11 First starting port 12 Second starting port 13 Big prize opening 24 Speaker 25 Board lamp 26 Production button 37 Frame lamp 41 First special symbol display 42 Second special symbol display Container 51 Pending icon 52 Pending number 53 Changing icon 55 Decorative pattern 56 Small pattern 57 4th pattern corresponding to the 1st special pattern 59 4th pattern corresponding to the 2nd special pattern 60-64 Effect image 70 Luminous effect during non-reach Image 80 Effect image 81 Reach line image 82 Effect image 91, 92 Effect image 101, 131, 141, 151 CPU
130 Production control section 140 Image and sound control section 150 Lamp control section 65 Operation promotion image 651 Validity period image

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a main control means and a performance control means,
The main control means is
a determining means for determining whether or not to perform a special game advantageous to the player when the starting condition is satisfied;
When the determination is made, an identification information display control means displays the result of the determination by displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the identification information;
a command transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined command;
The performance control means is
capable of receiving commands from the command transmitting means;
In response to the fluctuating display of the identification information, a plurality of first performance symbols corresponding to the identification information are varied, and in response to the stop display of the identification information, the plurality of first performance symbols are stopped and displayed,
In response to the fluctuating display of the identification information, a second effect pattern corresponding to the identification information is varied, and in response to the stop display of the identification information, the second effect pattern is stopped and displayed,
When the determination means determines that a special game is to be played, a specific display performance that displays the plurality of first performance symbols in a specific manner that suggests that the special game will be played before the identification information is stopped and displayed. It is possible to do
In the specific display performance, when temporarily stopping the first performance pattern of the specific mode without performing an emphasis performance that emphasizes the second performance pattern, by displaying a first predetermined image, the first performance pattern of the specific mode is displayed. A first emphasizing effect is performed to emphasize the first effect symbol, and after the first emphasizing effect, a second predetermined image different from the first predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to perform a second emphasis performance that emphasizes the first performance symbol, and to end the second emphasis performance during the temporary stop display of the first performance symbol in the specific mode,
The execution time of the first emphasis effect and the execution time of the second emphasis effect are different,
After the second emphasis performance, the emphasis performance of the first performance symbol is not performed until the temporarily stopped first performance symbol of the specific mode is stopped and displayed, and while the first performance symbol is stopped and displayed, the A gaming machine that does not execute a first emphasis performance and the second emphasis performance.

Images